project manual - tmay.net · 216-a st. johns avenue palatka, florida 32177 tel: (386)325-0213 fax:...

PROJECT MANUAL ARCHITECT’S JOB NO. 010R07

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION

for RURAL HEALTH CARE d/b/a

AZA HEALTH

ADMINISTRATION BUILING RENOVATION AND ADDITION PALATKA, FLORIDA

for

RURAL HEALTH CARE, INC. dba

AZA HEALTH CENTER 613 ST. JOHNS AVE, SUITE 307

PALATKA, FLORIDA 32177

ARCHITECT’S JOB NUMBER: 010R07

ARCHITECTS CRG Architects/Palatka, Inc.

216A St. Johns Avenue Palatka, Florida 32177

Tel: 386-325-0213 E: [email protected]

MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL/PLUMBING ENGINEER OCI Associates, Inc.

600 S. Orlando Avenue Suite #100

Maitland, FL 32751 Tel: 407-332-5110

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Southard Engineering

4566B NW 5th

Gainesville, FL 32609 Boulevard

Tel: 352-367-2526

January 29, 2020

mailto:[email protected]�

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1

The General Contractor shall be required to compare this Table of Contents with the bound Project Manual for legibility, omission or inclusion of any part of any section listed herein. It shall be the General Contractor’s responsibility to request, in writing, clarification from the office of the Architect. Clarifications shall be addressed by addenda to all who are registered with the Architect as having received Bidding documents. All requests for clarification shall be received seven days prior to the date set for the receipt of Bids.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

The General Contractor and Subcontractors shall review other sections of work applicable to their work and ascertain requirements in other section applicable to their work. Each shall be held responsible for coordination and inclusion of the work indicated as if it were in the particular subcontractor’s section. All subcontractors, suppliers, etc. shall be responsible for knowing what information is given on all sheets of the plans and specifications concerning his particular work.

DIVISION 0 BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID 00 25 13 MANDATORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE 00 31 00 EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION 00 31 13.13 PROJECT SCHEDULE 00 41 13 BID FORM 00 43 32 NON-COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT 00 43 36 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS 00 43 93 BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST AND FORMS 00 45 13 CONFIDENTIAL BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM 00 50 00 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 00 52 00 FORM OF CONTRACT 00 60 00 BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00 61 00 BID BOND 00 62 00 CERTIFICATE OF CONTRACTORS LICENSE 00 63 33 SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 65 19.16 CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE AND RELEASE OF LIEN (INCLUDES PARTIAL) 00 72 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 32 19 SUBMITTALS 01 35 00 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01 40 00 QUALITY CONTROL 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 50 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROL 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 65 00 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 74 13 PROGRESS CLEANING 01 74 23 FINAL CLEANING 01 77 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03 00 00 CONCRETE, GENERAL

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 2

DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY 04 72 00 CAST STONE DIVISION 5 METALS 05 44 00 COLD FORMED METAL TRUSSES 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATION DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTIC 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY DIVISION 7 MOISTURE CONTROL 07 21 16 INSULATION 07 41 13.16 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 07 42 93 METAL SOFFIT PANELS 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANT DIVISION 8 WINDOWS AND DOORS 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS 08 41 13 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 54 13 FIBERGLAS WINDOWS 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 13 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 08 80 00 GLASS AND GLAZING DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09 21 16 GYPSUM DRYWALL 09 30 00 CERAMIC TILE 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 65 00 LUXURY VINYL MODULAR FLOORING 09 91 00 PAINTING 09 97 23 CONCRETE AND MASONRY COATINGS DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 SIGNAGE 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 44 00 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES 10 55 13 MAILBOXES DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 32 16 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK 12 48 26 MODULAR ENTRANCE FLOORING DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 31 00 00 BUILDING EARTHWORK 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 25 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 31 16 TERMITE CONTROL DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 16 00 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, CURBS AND GUTTERS

END OF TABLE

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 11 16 – INVITATION TO BID 00 11 16-1

SECTION 00 11 16

INVITATION TO BID 1.1 INVITATION TO BIDDERS A. Contractors are invited to submit a sealed offer to Aza Health located at 613 St. Johns Avenue, Third Floor, Palatka, Florida 32177, before 4:00 p.m. local time on February 21, 2020 for the following Project:

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION

146 COMFORT ROAD PALATKA, FLORIDA 32177

1.2 BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Contract Documents for bidding may be examined and obtained at the office of the Architect or at the Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference on DATE: January 29, 2020 @ 2:00 P.M.

CRG ARCHITECTS/PALATKA, INC 216-A ST. JOHNS AVENUE PALATKA, FLORIDA 32177 TEL: (386)325-0213 FAX: (386)328-1401 B. General: Bidding Documents, in whole, are available at the Architect’s Office upon receipt of cash, checks or money orders made payable to CRG Architects for the total required amount. 1. Requests for billing will not be honored. Cash, check or money order will be accepted. C. Bidding Document Cost: Shipping charges are in addition to below stated amounts:

NON-REFUNDABLE ITEM DEPOSIT/EACH CD containing Bid Documents $ 5.00 Shipping Charges (per set) at cost D. Distribution: 1. Bidders: General Contractors are eligible to receive Bid Documents upon payment of a non-

refundable deposit. Additional bid documents can be provided to bid document holders upon request. Additional copies are available on non-refundable cost basis. Shipping charges are in addition thereto.

2. Subcontractors and Material suppliers are eligible to receive Bid Documents upon payment of a non-refundable deposit. Additional copies are available on non-refundable cost basis. Shipping charges are in addition thereto.

3. Other interested parties: Eligible for Bid Documents upon payment of non-refundable deposit and shipping costs as applicable. No partial sets will be distributed.

E. Documents, regardless of method of procurement, remain the property of the Architect and shall be

issued for no other purpose other than bidding on this project. Bid Documents shall be returned complete, bound, in original order, intact and within fourteen (14) days after receipt of bids.

1.3 BONDS A. The successful contractor is required to furnish Performance and Payment Bonds described in the Contract Documents. B. Bid guarantee in the form of a Bid Bond executed by the bidder and a qualified surety or a certified or cashier’s check on any national or state bank in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total proposal, including alternates, made payable to Aza Health, must accompany the bidder’s proposal. After opening bids, and in the event contract is awarded to the bidder, the bidder will, within ten (10) days after receiving same, execute contract and furnish the required bond, failing which the security shall become the property of the Owner as liquidated damages.

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 11 16 – INVITATION TO BID 00 11 16-2

1.4 PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF PROPOSAL A. All bids must be made on Proposal Forms, included herein, properly executed and placed in envelopes and marked: ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION 146 COMFORT ROAD PALATKA, FLORIDA 32177

Deliver or mail to: Aza Health Attn: Laura Spencer 613 St. Johns Avenue 3rd Floor Palatka, FL 32177 B. Aza Health anticipates awarding this project to a single bidder submitting the lowest and best bid meeting specifications and within budget parameters. Aza Health reserves the right to reject any or all bids submitted, to award all or parts of the bid, to waive any informalities in regards thereto, to waive any minor deviations in an otherwise valid bid proposal, to rebid or not, and to accept the bid which will be in their best interest. The Owner is not necessarily bound to accept the lowest bid if that bid is contrary to its best interest. C. No changes in the amounts of bids appearing on the outside of bids will be considered. Only the amounts shown inside the envelope will be considered. All changes, correction and erasures must be initialed by the person signing the bid. D. Furnish with your bids, satisfaction of your proper licensing. E. There will be a Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference to be held on January 29, 2020 at 2:00 PM at 613 St. Johns Avenue, 3rd Floor, Palatka, FL 32177. Bidders or their representatives are required to attend in order to be eligible to bid.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 25 13 – MANDATORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE 00 25 13-1

SECTON 00 25 13

MANDATORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. To be eligible to submit a bid for this Project, bidders must attend the Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference described in the Invitation to Bid B. Attendance is mandatory for General Contractors. Sub-contractors are invited and encouraged to attend. C. Agenda Outline: Prepared by Architect 1. Attendance roster to be signed by all attendees. 2. Introduction of Owner, Architect/Engineer Project Team, and Attendees. 3. Project Summary and Scope of Work 4. Availability of Documents a. Plan Rooms – Dodge Data & Analytics www.construction.com b. General Contractors c. Sub-Trade Plan Availability d. Set Purchases (full) 5. Invitation to Bid and Review of Bid Process (Section 00 11 16 & 00 41 13) 6. Contractual Agreement (Section 00 52 00) 7. List(s) of Subcontractors (Sections 00 43 36) 8. Submittals, Product Requirements, and Substitutions (Section 01 60 00, 01 32 19) 9. Addenda Schedule 10. Contractor Question Period (answers will be included in an addendum) 11. Closing Statements & Site Visit

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 AGENDA A. Copies of this agenda will be available to all parties in attendance.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 31 00 – EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION 00 31 00-1

SECTION 00 31 00

EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION 1.1 ORIGINAL DRAWINGS

A. Copies of the original drawings for the project are available for viewing at the office of the Architect. The original drawings were prepared by: Robert E. Taylor, Palatka, Florida.

B. These drawings were used by the Architect for design purposes and are not a part of the Contract

Documents. The use and interpretation of this information for any other purpose shall be entirely the responsibility of the using party. The Owner is not responsible for variations in the existing conditions. Bidders shall decide for themselves the character of the material and conditions to be encountered. Upon request by the bidder, the original drawings may be reviewed upon signing the following waiver:

"We acknowledge by the signature below that the use of the original drawings was intended solely

for the Architect's use in the design of this project and shall not be used as a basis for calculations in the preparation of our bid. The use and interpretation of the information for any other purposes shall be entirely the responsibility of the using party."

This waiver must be signed by a person or persons authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract.

Signature Date Typed or Printed Name Title Company Name

END OF DOCUMENT

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 31 13.13 – PROJECT SCHEDULE 00 31 13.13-1

SECTION 00 31 13.13

PROJECT SCHEDULE

• Bid Documents/Plans Available

o Date: January 29, 2020

• Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference

o Date: January 29, 2020

o Time: 2:00 pm

o Location: 613 St. Johns Avenue, 3rd

• Deadline for Bid Submission

Floor, Palatka, FL 32177

o Date: February 21, 2020

o Time: 4:00 pm

o Location: 613 St. Johns Avenue, 3rd

• Award of Bid

Floor, Palatka, FL 32177

o Date: To be determined

• Notice to Proceed Issued:

o Upon receipt of Bond, Certificate of Insurance, and Notice of Commencement

• Pre-Construction Conference (Anticipated Date)

o Date: To Be Determined

o Time: To be Determined

o Location: To be Determined

• Construction Start (Anticipated Date)

o To be Determined

• Renovation Start (Anticipated Date)

o To be Determined

• Substantial Completion

o 120 calendar days

• Final Completion

o 15 Calendar Days after Substantial Completion

• New Construction Start (Anticipated Date)

o To be Determined

• Substantial Completion

o 300 calendar days

• Final Completion

o 15 calendar days from Substantial Completion

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 41 13 – BID FORM 00 41 13-1

SECTION 00 41 13

BID FORM

FORM OF PROPOSAL (Submit in Duplicate)

(Read Instructions Carefully) (DO NOT RETYPE FORM)

DATE: FROM: (Name of Bidder/Firm Name) (Address) TO: Aza Health 613 St. Johns Ave Suite 307 Palatka, FL 32177 The Undersigned, hereinafter referred to as “Bidder”, having visited the site of the proposed project and become familiarized with all the conditions affecting and governing the construction of the project, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and other items, facilities, and services for the proper execution and completion of:

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION 146 COMFORT ROAD

PALATKA, FLORIDA 32177

In strict compliance with the drawings, specifications, addenda and all other Contract documents relating thereto as prepared by and on file in the office of:

CRG Architects/Palatka, Inc. 216 St. Johns Avenue Palatka, Florida 32177

and does hereby propose to furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services for the proper execution and completion of the work called for and described by said documents for the following: A. BASE BID:

Dollars ($ ).

C. GENERAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT: In submitting this bid, the undersigned agrees to the following: 1. To honor this bid for a period of 60 days. 2. To enter into and execute a Contract if awarded on the basis of this bid, within ten (10) calendar days after Agreement is submitted to him, and to furnish all bonds and insurance required in accordance with the Instructions To Bidders, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Standard Requirements, and Special Conditions. 3. The O.S.H.A. Hazard Communication Compliance Kit is, by reference, made a part hereof. By execution of this Proposal, Contractor acknowledges the O.S.H.A. Hazard Communication Compliance Kit and will abide by its contents in its entirety.


ADDENDUM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

Bidder to list all revisions received, or, if none, state “NONE RECEIVED”

Addendum No. , dated Addendum No. , dated ______ Addendum No. , dated Addendum No. , dated ______ Addendum No. , dated Addendum No. , dated

D. BID SECURITY

______

1. Accompanying this Form of Proposal is a Certified or Cashier’s Check, Cash, or a Bid Bond in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Base Bid.

2. This offer shall be open to acceptance for sixty (60) days from the bid closing date. If this bid is accepted by the Owner within the period stated above, we, the undersigned, will: a. Execute the Agreement within seven (7) days of its receipt. b. Commence the work within seven (7) days after written Notice to Proceed.

E. CONTRACT TIME

1. If this bid is accepted, we the undersigned will complete the work as required in Section 00 31 13.16, “Project Schedule”.

F. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

1. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive any informalities in the bidding.

2. By signing and submitting this bid, the bidder recognizes the requirements for ten percent (10%) retainage of payments, Paragraph 27.f of the General conditions, HUD Form 5370, dated April 2002, a component part of the Contract Document. The bidder further acknowledges that he understands that under the provisions of local statutes, the retainage will only be placed in an interest bearing escrow account on project when the contract amount is above that amount specified in those local statutes. Where Contractor's retainage is not governed by local statutes, it may only be subject to being placed in an interest bearing escrow account with the concurrence of the local HUD office. The bidder further acknowledges that the establishment of such an escrow account is not automatic, and may only be considered on written request by the Contractor to the Owner.

3. The bidder represents that he ( ) has, ( ) has not, participated in a previous Contract or subcontract subject to the Equal Opportunity Clause herein or the clause originally contained in Section 301 of Executive Order No. 10925, or the clause contained in Section 201 of Executive Order No. 11114, as amended by Executive Order No. 11375 of October 17, 1967; that he ( ) has, ( ) has not, filed all required compliance reports and that representations indicating submission of required compliance reports, signed by proposed subcontractors will be obtained prior to subcontract awards. The bidder further represents that he will, if required, submit, and require proposed subcontractors to submit, a compliance report prior to the award of the Contract or subcontract.

4. Certification of non-segregated facilities: By signing this bid, the bidder certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained. He certifies further that he will not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he will not permit his employees to perform their services at any location, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained. The bidder agrees that a breach of this certification is a violation of the Equal Opportunity Clause in this Contract. As used in the certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, rest rooms and wash rooms, restaurant and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage and dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the base of race, color, religion, or national origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. He further agrees that (except where he has obtained identical certifications from proposed subcontractors prior to the award of subcontracts for specific time periods) he will obtain identical certifications from proposed subcontractors prior to the award of subcontracts exceeding ten thousand and 00/100 dollars ($10,000) which are not exempt form the provisions of the Equal Employment Opportunity Clause, that he will retain such certifications in his files; and that he will forward a notice to his proposed subcontractors as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. NOTE: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. 1001.

5. Contractor agrees to protect, defend, indemnify and hold Aza Health Center, its officers, employees and agents free and harmless from and against any and all losses, penalties, damages, settlements, costs, charges, professional fees or other expenses or liabilities of every kind and character arising out of or


relating to any and all claims, liens, demands, obligations, actions, proceeding, or causes of action of every kind in connection with or arising out of this agreement and/or the performance hereof that are due to the agents. The Contractor further agrees to investigate, handle, respond to, provide defense for, and defend the same at its sole expense and agrees to bear all other costs and expenses related thereto.

G. OFFER 1. By the act of submitting this bid for the proposed Contract, the bidder represents that:

a. The Bidder and all subcontractors the bidder intends to use have carefully and thoroughly reviewed the drawings, Specifications, Addenda, and other construction Contract Documents and have found them complete and free from ambiguities and sufficient for the purpose intended; further that,

b. The Bidder and all workmen, employees, and subcontractors the Bidder intends to use are skilled and experienced in the type of construction represented by the construction Contract Documents bid upon; further that,

c. Neither the Bidder nor any of the Bidder’s employees agents, intended suppliers or subcontractors have relied upon any verbal representations, allegedly authorized or unauthorized from the Owner, or the Owner’s employees or agents, including Architects, engineers, or consultants, in assembling the Bid Price; and further that,

d. The Bid Price is solely based upon the construction Contract Documents and properly issued written Addenda and not upon any other written representation

H. APPENDICES 1. Submit the following Appendices concurrent with bid submissions. Note: Failure to include these items may cause the bid to be declared non-responsive and be rejected. CONFIDENTIAL BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM (00 45 13) EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION (00 31 00) BID FORM (00 41 13) NON-COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT (00 43 32) LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS (00 43 36) BID SUBMITTAL CHECK LIST with Authorized Signature (00 43 93-1) DRUG FREE WORKPLACE FORM (Optional) (00 43 93-2) PUBLIC ENTITY CRIME SWORN STATEMENT (Must be notarized) (Mandatory) (00 43 93-3) BID BOND FORM (00 61 00) CERTIFICATE OF CONTRACTORS LICENSE (00 62 00) PROOF OF INSURANCE (00 63 33)


Bidder hereby certifies that all statements and amounts entered herein have been carefully prepared under the express conditions as described in the Bidding Requirements, Contract Conditions, and other Contract Documents and that such statement are true and correct. BIDDER: ADDRESS*: STATE & ZIP CODE: TELEPHONE NUMBER: FAX NUMBER:

*If P. O. Box is used, provide physical 911 address of business location. By: (Officer of Firm Authorized to sign Bid, type name and title) (Signature of Officer) (Type Name and Title of Officer) Florida State Contractor License Number Notary Witness Thereof, (Date) (Notary Public Signature & Seal or Stamp) SEAL (if a corporation) In witness whereof, the bidder has hereunto set his signature and affixed his seal this____ day of ____ ____ _, AD 20 . FIRM NAME:

(TYPE OR PRINT) BY: Name and title of officer or other individual executing proposal: NAME:

(TYPE OR PRINT) TITLE:

(TYPE OR PRINT)

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 43 32 - NON-COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT 00 43 32-1

SECTION 00 43 32

NON-COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT

(Prime Bidder) State of County of , being first duly sworn, deposes and says: That he is (a partner or officer of the firm of, etc.) the party making the foregoing proposal or bid, that such proposal or bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidder or person, to put in sham bid or to refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sough by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person to fix the bid price of affiant or of any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against Aza Health or any person interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements in said proposal or bid are true. Signature of: Bidder, if the bidder is an individual Partner, if the bidder is a partnership Officer, if the bidder is a corporation Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20 . Notary Public My Commission expires:

END OF DOCUMENT

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 43 36 – BID FORM ATTACHMENT 00 43 36-1

SECTION 00 43 36

LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS

DIVISION OF WORK PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTOR PRINCIPAL/OFFICER CORP. ADDRESS LICENSE NO.

DEMOLITION

CONCRETE

MASONRY

DRYWALL/METAL STUDS

CARPENTRY

WOOD TRUSSES

FLOORING

ROOFING

PAINTING

STUCCO

CERAMIC TILE

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 43 36 – BID FORM ATTACHMENT 00 43 36-2

DIVISION OF WORK PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTOR PRINCIPAL/OFFICER CORP. ADDRESS LICENSE NO.

MILLWORK

ACOUSTICAL CEILING

PLUMBING

HVAC

ELECTRICAL

SIGNED: _________________________________________________________ (BIDDER)

*List only one Sub-Contractor per trade

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 43 93 – BID CHECK LIST AND FORMS 00 43 93-1

SECTION 00 43 93

BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST The following documents must be included in bid submittals with the exception of the Drug Free Workplace Program Form which is voluntary: CONFIDENTIAL BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM (00 45 13) EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION (00 31 00) BID FORM (00 41 13) NON-COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT (00 43 32) LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS (00 43 36) BID CHECK LIST with Authorized Signature (00 43 93-1) DRUG FREE WORKPLACE FORM (Optional) (00 43 93-2) PUBLIC ENTITY CRIME SWORN STATEMENT (Must be notarized) (Mandatory) (00 43 93-3) BID BOND FORM (00 61 00) CERTIFICATE OF CONTRACTORS LICENSE (00 62 00) PROOF OF INSURANCE (00 63 33) AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE: All companies certify by their signature that they have read and understand the conditions and specifications of the bid and have included all required documents, and that they have the authority, capacity and capability to perform according to the conditions and specifications of the bid request. Company Name: Type or Print Address: City, State, Zip: Telephone Number: Authorized Signature: Printed Name and Title:


DRUG FREE WORKPLACE PROGRAM FORM In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a business shall:

1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing,

possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition.

2) Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business’s policy of maintaining

a drug-free workplace, any available drug counselling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations.

3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a

copy of the statement specified in Subsection (1). 4) In the statement specified in Subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working in the

commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendre to, any violation of Chapter 893 or of any controlled substance law of the United States or any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after conviction.

5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation

program if such is available in the employee’s community, by any employee who is so convicted. 6) Make good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this

section. AS THE PERSON AUTHORIZED TO SIGN THIS STATEMENT, I CERTIFY THAT THIS FIRM, ________________________________________________________________________________

(Name of Company)

COMPLIES FULLY WITH THE ABOVE REQUIREMENTS.

Authorized Signature Date


SWORN STATEMENT UNDER SECTION 287.133(3)(a), FLORIDA STATUTES, ON PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES (To be signed in the presence of a notary public or other officer authorized to administer oaths)

STATE OF

COUNTY OF Before me, the undersigned authority, personally appeared , who, being by me first duly sworn, made the following statement: 1. The business address of (name of bidder or contractor) is 2. My relationship to (name of bidder or contractor) is:

(state relationship such as sole proprietor, partner, president, vice president)

3. I understand that a public entity crime as defined in Section 287.133 of the Florida Statutes includes a violation of any state or federal law by a person with respect to and directly related to the transaction of business with any public entity in Florida or with an agency or political subdivision of any other state or with the United States, including, but not limited to, any bid or contract for goods or services to be provided to any public entity or such an agency or political subdivision and involving antitrust, fraud, theft, bribery, collusion, racketeering, conspiracy, or material misrepresentation. 4. I understand that “convicted” or “conviction” is defined by the statute to mean a finding of guilt or a conviction of a public entity crime, with or without an adjudication of guilt, in any federal or state trial court of record relating to charges brought by indictment or information after July 1, 1989, as a result of a jury verdict, nonjury trial, or entry of a plea of guilty or nolo contendre. 5. I understand that “affiliate” is defined by the statute to mean (1) a predecessor or successor of a person or a corporation convicted of a public entity crime, or (20 an entity under the control of any natural person who is active in the management of the entity and who has been convicted of a public entity crime, or (3) those officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active in the management of an affiliate, or (4) a person or corporation who knowingly entered into a joint venture with a person who has been convicted of a public entity crime in Florida during the preceding 36 months. 6. Neither the bidder or contractor nor any officer, director, executive, partner, shareholder, employee, member, or agent who is active in the management of the bidder or contractor nor any affiliate of the bidder or contractor has been convicted of a public entity crime subsequent to July 1, 1989. (Draw a line through paragraph 6 if paragraph 7 below applies) 7. There has been a conviction of a public entity crime by the bidder or contractor, or an officer, director, executive, partner, shareholder, employee, member, or agent of the bidder or contractor who is active in the management of the bidder or contractor or an affiliate of the bidder or the contractor.A determination has been made pursuant to Section 287.133(3) by order of the Division of Administrative Hearings that it is not in the public interest for the name of the convicted person or affiliate to appear on the convicted vendor list. The name of the convicted person or affiliate is . A copy of the order of the Division of Administrative Hearings is attached to this statement. (Draw a line through paragraph 7 is paragraph 6 above applies) Sworn to and subscribed before me in the state and county first mentioned above on the day of , 20________ (affix seal) Notary Public

My Commission Expires PUR 7068 (8/89)

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 45 13 - CONFIDENTIAL BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM 00 45 13-1

SECTION 00 45 13

CONFIDENTIAL BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM Submitted to: Name of Project: Submitted by: (Firm Name) Address: (List Home Office and all Branch Office Addresses) City: State: Zip: Tel:

Name

( ) 1. TYPE OF FIRM: Corporation Partnership Sole Proprietorship Years in Business: 2. OFFICERS, PARTNERS OR OWNERS & CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE

Title

Years of Experience in Classification of Work listed

3. NUMBER OF PERSONNEL IN ORGANIZATION: Administrative Engineering Office Shop Field 4. REFERENCES: Bank(s) Maintaining Account(s): Suppliers: Other References:


5. TYPICAL CONTRACTS COMPLETED DURING LAST FIVE YEARS Year Name of Project Architect/Engineer* Contract Amount

6. AVERAGE ANNUAL BILLING FOR LAST FIVE YEARS $ 7. TOTAL WORK IN PROGRESS AND UNDER CONTRACT $ 8. LIST MAJOR WORK UNDER CONTRACT:

% Complete Name of Project Architect/Engineer* Contract Amount

*Required – Name, telephone number, address and contact person 9. LIST CURRENT PROJECTS ON WHICH YOUR FIRM IS THE CANDIDATE FOR CONTRACT AWARD: 10. HAVE YOU AT ANY TIME FAILED TO COMPLETE A CONTRACT? YES NO ARE THERE ANY JUDGMENTS, CLAIMS OR SUITES PENDING OR OUTSTANDING AGAINST YOU? YES NO


IF THE ANSWER TO EITHER QUESTION IS YES, SUBMIT DETAILS ON SEPARATE SHEET. LIST ALL LAWSUITS YOUR FIRM HAS FILED DUE TO CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS IN THE LAST FIVE YEARS: 11. FINANCIAL STATEMENT Current Assets $ Fixed Assets (Depreciated) $ Other Assets $ TOTAL ASSETS $ Current Liabilities $ Long Term Liabilities $ TOTAL LIABILITIES $ NET WORTH $ Date of latest Balance Sheet: Prepared by , a certified Public Accountant, and available upon request . Dated at , this day of , 20 Pursuant to information for prospective bidders for above mentioned proposed project, the undersigned is submitting the information as required with the understanding that it is for your confidential use only to assist in determining the qualifications of this organization to perform the type and magnitude of work included; and further, guarantee the truth and accuracy of all statements herein made. We will accept your determination of qualifications without prejudice. The Surety herein named, any other bonding company, bank, subcontractor, we have done business, or who have extended any credit to us are hereby authorized to furnish you with any information you may request concerning our organization including, but not limited to, information concerning performance on previous work or credit standing with any of them. We hereby release any and all such parties from any legal responsibility whatsoever of having furnished such information to you. Name of Organization: By: Date: Title: Attested to By: Title:

END OF DOCUMENT

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 50 00 - CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 00 50 00-1

SECTION 00 50 00

CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Schedule of Amounts for Contract Payments. B. Application and Certificate for Payment. C. Subcontractors. D. Change Procedures. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 00 52 00 - Form of Contract: Contract Price. B. Section 00 72 13 - General Conditions C. Section 01 32 19 - Submittals D. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements 1.3 APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT A. Submit to Architect three (3) copies, each copy bearing original signatures, of AIA Form C702 – Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA Form G702 Continuation Sheet. B. Computer generated simulation, bearing the required original signatures, in a corresponding format against which no exception is taken by the Architect and which is acceptable to the Owner, and may be substituted for the above forms. Facsimile or electronic transmission of this material is not permitted. C. Payment Period: As set forth in Section 00 72 13. D. Payment Processing: Each Application for Payment must be received by the Architect no later than the last day of each month. The omission of any required attachments; the failure to clearly organize, cross-reference, and correlate submittal; or other nonconformance with the requirements of this Article may delay processing or cause Application for Payment to be returned without review. If the Contractor requests payment for items which have not been acceptably completed, those items will be deleted and the payment adjusted accordingly. 1.4 SUBCONTRACTORS A. All Contracts between the Contractor and subcontractors shall contain the equal opportunity employment requirements and the prevailing wage rate requirements. B. Before a particular subcontractor begins work on this Project, his required insurance certificates must

be received by the Architect and the Owner. 1.5 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the work not involving an adjustment to the Contract

Price or Contract Time as authorized by Document 00 72 13, by issuing Field Orders. Should the Contractor consider any such change to involve the need for adjustment to the Contract Price or to the Contract Time, he shall inform the Architect before proceeding with that change.

B. The Architect may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed

change with supplementary or revised drawings and Specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change, with a stipulation of any overtime work required. Contractor will prepare and submit under provisions of Document 00 72 13, Article 9.

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 50 00 - CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 00 50 00-2

C. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to the Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the work. Include a statement describing the reason for the change and the effect on the Contract Price and Contract Time with full documentation, and a statement describing the effect on work by separate or other contractors where applicable. Document any requested substitutions as described in Section 01 60 00. Submit requests for substitutions under provisions of Section 01 32 19. Proposal request initiated by the Contractor may not be on a preprinted "Change Order" form, nor include a place for authorizing signature.

D. Stipulated Price Change Order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or

Contractor's request for a Change Order, as prepared by the Architect into the form of a Change Order, and as approved by the Owner. Any work related to a pending Stipulated Price Change Order before receipt by the Contractor of a fully executed copy is at his own risk.

E. Direct Cost Change Order: For predetermined unit cost and quantities, the Change Order will be

executed in a fixed price basis and a Stipulated Price Change Order executed. For quantities of units of work which are not predetermined, changes in Contract Price or Contract Time will be computed based in submittal of an itemized account and supporting data to establish direct cost prices by occurrence before undertaking changes. The Contracting Officer will determine the change allowable in the Contract documents, and authorize the Contractor to proceed based on incorporating the work in a Change Order at such time as the quantities are known. Any work related to a pending Direct Cost Change Order before receipt by the Contracting Officer is at his own risk.

F. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided

in the Conditions of the Contract.

END OF SECTION

Document A101TM

– 2017Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum

Init.

/

AIA Document A101™ – 2017. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 14:23:55 ET on 10/07/2019 under Order No.1203274669 which expires on 08/08/2020, and is not for resale.User Notes: (809906292)

1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text.

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

The parties should complete A101™–2017, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds, contemporaneously with this Agreement. AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by reference. Do not use with other general conditions unless this document is modified.

AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year (In words, indicate day, month and year.)

BETWEEN the Owner:(Name, legal status, address and other information)

and the Contractor:(Name, legal status, address and other information)

for the following Project:(Name, location and detailed description)

Sample Form

The Architect:(Name, legal status, address and other information)

The Owner and Contractor agree as follows.

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 52 00 - FORM OF CONTRACT

00 52 00 - 1

Init.

/


2

TABLE OF ARTICLES

1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT

3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

4 CONTRACT SUM

5 PAYMENTS

6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION

7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION

8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

EXHIBIT A INSURANCE AND BONDS

ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTSThe Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, all of which form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than a Modification, appears in Article 9.

ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACTThe Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except as specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others.

ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION§ 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be:(Check one of the following boxes.)

[ ] The date of this Agreement.

[ ] A date set forth in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner.

[ ] Established as follows:(Insert a date or a means to determine the date of commencement of the Work.)

If a date of commencement of the Work is not selected, then the date of commencement shall be the date of this Agreement.

§ 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement of the Work.

§ 3.3 Substantial Completion§ 3.3.1 Subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work:(Check one of the following boxes and complete the necessary information.)


00 52 00 - 2

Init.

/


3

[ ] Not later than ( ) calendar days from the date of commencement of the Work.

[ ] By the following date:

§ 3.3.2 Subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents, if portions of the Work are to be completed prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, the Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of such portions by the following dates:

Portion of Work Substantial Completion Date

§ 3.3.3 If the Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion as provided in this Section 3.3, liquidated damages, if any, shall be assessed as set forth in Section 4.5.

ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM§ 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor’s performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be ($ ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2 Alternates§ 4.2.1 Alternates, if any, included in the Contract Sum:

Item Price

§ 4.2.2 Subject to the conditions noted below, the following alternates may be accepted by the Owner following execution of this Agreement. Upon acceptance, the Owner shall issue a Modification to this Agreement.(Insert below each alternate and the conditions that must be met for the Owner to accept the alternate.)

Item Price Conditions for Acceptance

§ 4.3 Allowances, if any, included in the Contract Sum:(Identify each allowance.)

Item Price

§ 4.4Unit prices, if any:(Identify the item and state the unit price and quantity limitations, if any, to which the unit price will be applicable.)

Item Units and Limitations Price per Unit ($0.00)

(Paragraphs deleted)§ 4.5Liquidated damages, if any:(Insert terms and conditions for liquidated damages, if any.)

(Paragraphs deleted)(Table deleted)§ 4.6 Other:(Insert provisions for bonus or other incentives, if any, that might result in a change to the Contract Sum.)


00 52 00 - 3

Init.

/


4

ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS§ 5.1 Progress Payments§ 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows:

§ 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month, the Owner shall make payment of the amount certified to the Contractor not later than the day of the month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment of the amount certified shall be made by the Owner not later than ( ) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment.(Federal, state or local laws may require payment within a certain period of time.)

§ 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form, and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy, as the Architect may require. This schedule of values shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment.

§ 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment.

§ 5.1.6 In accordance with AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows:

§ 5.1.6.1 The amount of each progress payment shall first include:.1 That portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work;.2 That portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably

stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction, or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing; and

.3 That portion of Construction Change Directives that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified.

§ 5.1.6.2 The amount of each progress payment shall then be reduced by:.1 The aggregate of any amounts previously paid by the Owner;.2 The amount, if any, for Work that remains uncorrected and for which the Architect has previously

withheld a Certificate for Payment as provided in Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017;.3 Any amount for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier,

unless the Work has been performed by others the Contractor intends to pay;.4 For Work performed or defects discovered since the last payment application, any amount for which

the Architect may withhold payment, or nullify a Certificate of Payment in whole or in part, as provided in Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017; and

.5 Retainage withheld pursuant to Section 5.1.7.

§ 5.1.7 Retainage§ 5.1.7.1 For each progress payment made prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, the Owner may withhold the following amount, as retainage, from the payment otherwise due:(Insert a percentage or amount to be withheld as retainage from each Application for Payment. The amount of retainage may be limited by governing law.)


00 52 00 - 4

Init.

/


5

§ 5.1.7.1.1 The following items are not subject to retainage:(Insert any items not subject to the withholding of retainage, such as general conditions, insurance, etc.)

§ 5.1.7.2 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows:(If the retainage established in Section 5.1.7.1 is to be modified prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, including modifications for Substantial Completion of portions of the Work as provided in Section 3.3.2, insert provisions for such modifications.)

§ 5.1.7.3 Except as set forth in this Section 5.1.7.3, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, the Contractor may submit an Application for Payment that includes the retainage withheld from prior Applications for Payment pursuant to this Section 5.1.7. The Application for Payment submitted at Substantial Completion shall not include retainage as follows:(Insert any other conditions for release of retainage upon Substantial Completion.)

§ 5.1.8 If final completion of the Work is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, the Owner shall pay the Contractor any additional amounts in accordance with Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017.

§ 5.1.9 Except with the Owner’s prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site.

§ 5.2 Final Payment§ 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when

.1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor’s responsibility to correct Work as provided in Article 12 of AIA Document A201–2017, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment; and

.2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect.

§ 5.2.2 The Owner’s final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect’s final Certificate for Payment, or as follows:

§ 5.3 InterestPayments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located.(Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.)

%

ARTICLE 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION§ 6.1 Initial Decision MakerThe Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201–2017, unless the parties appoint below another individual, not a party to this Agreement, to serve as the Initial Decision Maker.(If the parties mutually agree, insert the name, address and other contact information of the Initial Decision Maker, if other than the Architect.)


00 52 00 - 5

Init.

/


6

§ 6.2 Binding Dispute ResolutionFor any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201–2017, the method of binding dispute resolution shall be as follows:(Check the appropriate box.)

[ ] Arbitration pursuant to Section 15.4 of AIA Document A201–2017

[ ] Litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction

[ ] Other (Specify)

If the Owner and Contractor do not select a method of binding dispute resolution, or do not subsequently agree in writing to a binding dispute resolution method other than litigation, Claims will be resolved by litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction.

ARTICLE 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION§ 7.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017.

§ 7.1.1 If the Contract is terminated for the Owner’s convenience in accordance with Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017, then the Owner shall pay the Contractor a termination fee as follows:(Insert the amount of, or method for determining, the fee, if any, payable to the Contractor following a termination for the Owner’s convenience.)

§ 7.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017.

ARTICLE 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS§ 8.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201–2017 or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents.

§ 8.2 The Owner’s representative:(Name, address, email address, and other information)

§ 8.3 The Contractor’s representative:(Name, address, email address, and other information)


00 52 00 - 6

Init.

/


7

§ 8.4 Neither the Owner’s nor the Contractor’s representative shall be changed without ten days’ prior notice to the other party.

§ 8.5 Insurance and Bonds§ 8.5.1 The Owner and the Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance as set forth in AIA Document A101™–2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 8.5.2 The Contractor shall provide bonds as set forth in AIA Document A101™–2017 Exhibit A, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 8.6 Notice in electronic format, pursuant to Article 1 of AIA Document A201–2017, may be given in accordance with AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, if completed, or as otherwise set forth below:(If other than in accordance with AIA Document E203–2013, insert requirements for delivering notice in electronic format such as name, title, and email address of the recipient and whether and how the system will be required to generate a read receipt for the transmission.)

(Paragraphs deleted)§ 8.7Other provisions:

ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS§ 9.1 This Agreement is comprised of the following documents:

.1 AIA Document A101™–2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor

.2 AIA Document A101™–2017, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds

.3 AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

.4 AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, dated as indicated below:(Insert the date of the E203-2013 incorporated into this Agreement.)

.5 Drawings

Number Title Date

.6 Specifications

Section Title Date Pages

.7 Addenda, if any:

Number Date Pages

Portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposalrequirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding or proposal requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9.

.8 Other Exhibits:(Check all boxes that apply and include appropriate information identifying the exhibit where required.)


00 52 00 - 7

Init.

/


8

[ ] AIA Document E204™–2017, Sustainable Projects Exhibit, dated as indicated below:(Insert the date of the E204-2017 incorporated into this Agreement.)

[ ] The Sustainability Plan:

Title Date Pages

[ ] Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract:

Document Title Date Pages

.9 Other documents, if any, listed below:(List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201™–2017 provides that the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements, and other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. Any such documents should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.)

This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above.

OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature)

(Printed name and title) (Printed name and title)


00 52 00 - 8

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 60 00 – BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00 60 00-1

SECTION 00 60 00

BONDS AND CERTIFICATES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND A. AIA Document A312 Performance and Payment Bond, 2010 Edition is the form to be used for this Work (Copy Attached to this Section). B. AIA Document A312 may be purchased from the Florida Association of the American Institute of Architects (AIA Florida) 104 East Jefferson Street, Tallahassee, Florida, tel: 904-222-7590 1.2 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR & MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND A. AIA Document A312 Performance and Payment Bond, 2010 Edition is the form to be used for this Work (Copy Attached to this Section). B. AIA Document A312 may be purchased from the Florida Association of the American Institute of Architects (AIA Florida) 104 East Jefferson Street, Tallahassee, Florida, tel: 904-222-7590 1.3 BONDS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. See Divisions for other bonds, warranties, etc., that may be required. 1.4 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE A. Contractor shall provide all relevant certificates of insurance.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 61 00 - BID BOND 00 61 00-1

SECTION 00 61 00

BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we the undersigned,

(Name of Principal) as Principal, and ,as Surety (Name of Surety) are held and firmly bound unto the Aza Health hereinafter called the "Owner," in the penal sum of DOLLARS, lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these present. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that whereas the Principal has submitted the accompanying bid, dated the day of , 20 for NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall not withdraw said bid within the period specified therein after the opening of the same, or, if no period be specified, within sixty (60) days after the said opening, and shall within the period specified therefore, or, if no period be specified within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented to him for signature, enter into a written contract with bond with good and sufficient surety or sureties, as may be required, for the faithful performance and proper fulfillment of such contract; or in the event of the withdrawal of said bid within the period specified, or the failure to enter into such contact and give such bond within the time specified, if the Principal shall pay the local Authority the difference between the amount specified in said bid and the amount for which the Local Authority may procure the required work or supplies or both, if the latter amount be in excess of the former, then the above obligation shall be void and of no effect, otherwise to remain in full force and virtue. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bounded parties have executed this instrument under their several seals this

____

day of ____________ 20 __

the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body.

In presence of: (SEAL) (Individual Principal) (SEAL) (Business Address) (SEAL) (Individual Principal) (SEAL) (Business Address)

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 61 00 - BID BOND 00 61 00-2

Attest: (Corporate Principal) (Business Address) By: (affix corporate seal) Attest: (Corporate Surety) (Business Address) By: (affix corporate seal)

(Power-of-Attorney for person signing for Surety Company must be attached.) CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE PRINCIPAL I, certify that I am the

for the corporation named as Principal in the within Bond: that , who signed

said Bond on behalf of the Principal was then of said

corporation; that I know his signature, and his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bond duly signed, sealed, and

attested to for and in behalf of said corporation by authority of its governing body.

(Corporate Seal)

END OF DOCUMENT

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 62 00 - CERTIFICATE OF CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE 00 62 00-1

SECTION 00 62 00

CERTIFICATE OF CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE The Contractor shall provide a copy of his current license which authorizes him to perform commercial work. NOTE: A city or county occupational license will not suffice for the purpose of this section. The Contractor shall provide an original ink signature on the face of the copy of the license. This shall be provided as part of the bid. The Contractor's license number and date of registration must appear on the envelope containing the bid; otherwise the bid will not be considered.

END OF DOCUMENT

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 63 33 – SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 63 33-1

SECTION 00 63 33

SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. Bid Documents includes the drawings and specifications containing the “Invitation to Bid”, the “Supplemental Instructions to Bidders”, the “Instructions to Bidders”, Scope of Work, other sample Bid and Contract Forms, the General and Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and related Drawing Schedules and Details. Any addenda issued prior to the receipt of bids shall also become part of the Bid Documents.

B. All definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, or in other Contract

Documents are applicable to the Bid Documents.

C. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bid Documents by additions, deletion, clarifications or corrections.

D. A bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the work or designated portion thereof for the

sums stipulated therein supported by data called for in the Bid Documents.

E. Base Bid is the sum stated in the bid for which the bidder offers to perform the work described as the Base, to which work may be added or deducted for sums stated in any alternated bids.

F. An alternate bid (or Alternate) is an amount sated in the bid to be added to or deducted from the

amount of the Base Bid, if the corresponding change in project scope or materials or methods of construction described in the Bid Documents is accepted.

G. A Unit Price is an amount stated in the bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services

as described in the Contract Documents.

H. A bidder is one who submits a bid for a prime Contract with the Owner for the work described in the proposed Contract Documents. Each bidder must have the qualifications described hereunder in Paragraph 1.2.

I. A sub-bidder is one who submits a bid to a bidder for materials or labor for a portion of the work.

Each sub-bidder must have the qualifications hereunder in Paragraph 1.2.

J. A surety is a corporate body which is bound with and for the bidder, which is primarily liable and which guarantees the faithful performance of the Contract, if it is awarded to the bidder.

1.2 BIDDERS QUALIFICATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

A. Bidders Qualifications: 1. In order to be qualified, a bidder must

a. Be able to present evidence that he and his subcontractors are currently registered with, or hold an unexpired certificate applicable to this class of building issued by the Florida Construction Industry Licensing Board, in accordance with Chapter 489, Part I, Licensing of Construction Industry, Florida Statutes, or the Florida Electrical and Alarm System Contractors Licensing Board, in accordance with Chapter 489, Part II, Florida Statutes; or the Local Plumbers Licensing Board, in accordance with Chapter 553, Part I, Florida Statutes.

2. In order to be qualified if the bidder is a Corporation, it must be properly registered with the State of Florida, Department of State, Division of Corporations; and must hold a current State Corporate Charter number in accordance with Chapter 607 Florida Statutes.

3. The Agreement will only be entered into with responsible bidders found to be satisfactory by the Owner, qualified by experience and in a financial position to do the work specified. As a minimum, bidders shall be able to meet the following requirements described below. Bidders shall furnish documentation on AIA Document 305 - Contractor’s Qualifications Statement, as to: a. Bond ability b. Insurability c. Experience in similar work - Furnish names and addresses of Owners of prior work

performed and location of work performed.


d. Adequate plant and equipment. e. Supervisory personnel with experience in similar work. f. Suitable finance resources g. Service facilities h. Permanent organization i. Existing work load of such nature and quantity as not to interfere with the

performance of this Contract. 4. Each bidder is required to be familiar with all Federal, State and local laws, ordinances, rules

and regulations that in any manner affect the work. Ignorance on the part of the bidder or sub-bidder will in no way relieve him from the responsibility.

5. Each bidder shall be prepared to furnish information to confirm their qualifications as described hereunder in Paragraph 1.6.

B. Each bidder by making his bid represents that:

1. He has read and understands the Bid Documents and his bid is made in accordance therewith. 2. He has visited the site and has familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the

work is to be performed and has correlated his observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents.

3. His bid is based upon the materials, systems, and equipment described in the Bid Documents without exception.

1.3 BID DOCUMENTS

A. Copies: 1. Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bid Documents from the Architect designated in the

“Invitation to Bid”. Bid Documents must be procured through the Architect’s Office. 2. Bidders shall use complete sets of Bid Documents in preparing for bids; the Architect and

Owner do not assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bid Documents in preparing bids.

3. The Architect, in making copies of the Bid Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining bids on the work and does not confer a license or grant for any other use.

4. Bid Documents may be procured from the office of the Architect upon receipt of deposit in the amount stated in the “Invitation to Bid”, made payable to CRG Architects/Palatka, Inc. a. All Documents shall be returned prepaid and in good condition to the Architect within

fourteen (14) days after bid opening date. b. No partial sets of drawings and/or Specifications will be issued.

B. Interpretation of Correction of Bid Documents:

1. Bidders shall promptly notify the Architect of any ambiguity, inconsistency, or error which they may discover upon examination of the Bid Documents or the site and local conditions.

2. Bidders requiring clarification or an interpretation of the Bid Documents shall make a written request to the Architect to reach him at least seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of bids.

3. Any interpretation, correction, or change in the Bid Documents will be made by the Architect by addendum. Interpretations, corrections, or changes of the Bid Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and bidders shall not rely upon such interpretations, corrections and changes. Only the Architect will issue addenda.

4. No oral explanations in regard to the meaning of the Bid Documents will be made and no oral instructions will be given before the award of the Contract except as described in the sub-paragraph entitled “Pre-Bid Conference” herewith.

C. Basis for Bid - Trade Names: 1. When reference is made in the Contract Documents to trade names, brand names, or to the names of manufacturers, such references are made solely to indicate that products of the description may be furnished and are not intended to restrict competitive Bid. If it is desired to use products of trade or brand names or of manufacturers names which are different from those mentioned in the Contract Documents, application for the approval of the use of such products must be in receipt of the Architect within ten (10) days prior to the date set for the opening of bids. The latter provision is a restriction which applies only to the party making a submittal. Therefore, the aforesaid restriction does not inhibit the Architect from adding or deleting trade names, brand names or names of manufacturers by addendum. The burden of proving acceptability of a proposed product for use in place of a product of products designated by trade name or names, brand name or names, or by the name or names of


manufacturers in the Contract Documents rests on the party submitting the request for approval. 2. The written application for approval of proposed product must be accompanies by technical data which the party requesting approval desires to submit in support of his application. The Architect will give consideration to reports from reputable independent testing laboratories, verified experience records showing the reputation of the proposed product with previous users, evidence of reputation of the manufacturer for prompt delivery, evidence of reputation of the manufacturer for efficiency in servicing its products, or any other written information that is helpful in the circumstances. The application to the Architect for approval of a proposed product must be accompanied by a schedule setting forth in which respects the materials or equipment submitted for consideration differ from the materials or equipment designated in the Contract Documents. The degree of proof required for approval of a proposed product as acceptable for use in place of named product of named products is that amount of proof necessary to convince a reasonable person beyond all doubt. To be approved, a proposed product must also meet or exceed all express requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. If the submittal is approved by the Architect an addendum will be issued by the Architect to all prospective bidders. Issuance of an addendum is a representation to all bidders that the Architect in the exercise of his professional discretion established that the product submitted for approval is acceptable and meets or exceeds all express requirements. In order for the Architect to prepare an Addendum intelligently, an application for approval of a product must be accompanied by a copy of the published recommendations of the manufacturer for the installation of the product together with a complete schedule of changes in the drawings and specifications, if any, which must be made in the work in order to permit the use and installation of the proposed product in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of a product. 4. Unless requests for approvals of other products have been received and approvals have been published by addendum in accordance with the above procedure, the successful bidder may furnish no products of any trade names, brand names, or manufacturers’ names except those designated in the Contract Documents with the exception of any changes or substitution that may be effected via Change Order. Any party who alleges that rejection of a submittal is the result of bias, prejudice, caprice, or error on the part of the Architect may request a conference with a representative of the Owner, provided that the request for said conference, submitted in writing, shall have reached the Owner at least five (5) days prior to the date set for the opening of bids, time being of the essence. D. Pre-Bid Conference: 1. A Pre-Bid Conference will be held at the time and place described in the “Invitation to Bid” at which time the Architect will be available to clarify, interpret and assist bidders to better understand the Bid Documents. At that time, the Architect will answer any questions and make any and all explanations required by the bidders. However, only those explanations or instructions issued by written addendum shall be used in Bid. 2. No later than three days prior to bid date, the Architect will issue an addendum which will include all approved substitutions and changes to the Contract Documents, along with written explanations of any matters arising from discussion at the Pre-Bid Conference.

E. Addenda:

1. The Architect is responsible for addenda to be delivered to all who are known to the Architect to have received a Bid Package or a complete set of Bid Documents. The Architect will not be responsible for issuance or receipt of addenda forwarded by the bidder’s mail carrier.

2. Each bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting his bid that he has received all addenda issued, and he shall acknowledge their receipt in his bid.

1.4 BID PROCEDURES

A. Form and Style of Bids: 1. Bids shall be submitted in duplicate using exact copies of the Proposal Form provided in Bid

Packages. If necessary, copies of these forms may be obtained from the Architect at a cost of $1.00 per sheet for letter size copies ($6.00 per set).

2. All blanks on the Proposal Form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink. 3. Where so indicated by the makeup of the Proposal Form, sums shall be expressed in both

words and figures, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words shall govern.

4. No interlineations, alteration, excisions, or special conditions shall be made; erasures shall be explained or noted over the signature of the bidder. Any unexplained omissions, erasures,


alterations, information not requested or other irregularities of any kind may constitute a cause for rejection of the bid by the Owner.

5. Each copy of the bid shall include the legal name and full business address of the bidder and a statement that the bidder is sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation, or any other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a Contract. A bid submitted by an agent shall have current Power of Attorney attached certifying the agent’s authority to bind the bidder to a Contract. The Power of Attorney must then be signed by the Principal within ten (10) calendar days of bid submission and must refer to the specific project and bid.

6. Bids submitted by a corporation must be signed with the legal name and seal of the corporation followed by the name of the state of its incorporation and the manual signature and designation of an officer, agent, or other person authorized to bind the corporation and Florida State Charter Number.

7. Bids submitted by partnership shall show the names of all partners and must be signed in the partnership name by one of the partners. The partnership signature shall be followed by the manual signature of the partner signing.

8. In every case, the name of the person signing and his designation shall be typed or printed below his signature. A person who affixes his signature the words “President”, “Secretary”, “Agent” or other designation, without disclosing his principal, may be held to be individually responsible for such bid. Satisfactory evidence of the authority of an officer, agent, attorney or other person signing for partnership or an individual shall be furnished.

B. Bid Security:

1. As stipulated in the “Invitation to Bid”, each bid shall be accompanied by a Bid Bond (on form enclosed, Document 00 61 00) in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Contract Sum listed on the bidders Proposal Form pledging that the bidder will enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in his bid and will furnish Bonds as described hereunder in Paragraph 1.7 covering the faithful of all obligations arising thereunder.

2. The Bid Security shall be submitted with the understanding that it guarantees the bidder will not withdraw his bid for a period of sixty (60) days after the scheduled date and time for the receipt of bids described in the “Invitation to Bid”; that if his bid is accepted, he will enter into a written contract with the Owner in accordance with the Form of Agreement described hereunder in Paragraph 1.7 will be given; and that in the event of withdrawal of the bid within the stated withdrawal period, or failure to enter into the Agreement and furnish the Bonds within ten (10) days after he has received notice of acceptance of his bid or within any extended period the Owner may grant, the bidder shall be in default and shall be liable to the Owner for the full amount of the Bid Security as damages due the Owner on the account of the default of the bidder in any particular hereof.

3. The Bid Security shall be returned to all bidders after the Owner and the accepted bidder have executed the Agreement and Labor and Performance Bond has been approved by the Owner.

4. If the required Agreement and Bonds described hereunder in Paragraph 1.7 have not been executed within sixty (60) days after the date of the opening of the bids, then the Bid Security of any bidder will be returned upon his request, provided he has not been notified of the acceptance of his bid prior to the date of such request.

5. If the Bid Security is in the form of a Bid Bond, the Surety Company furnishing the Bond shall be acceptable if it complies with the provisions described hereunder in Paragraph 1.7. Type or print dollar amount of the Bond wherever required. The words “5% of the Bid” are not sufficient and will require re-execution of the Bond. The Bid Bond shall be signed by a Florida Licensed Resident Agent who holds Power of Attorney from the Surety Company issuing the Bond. a. Prepare two (2) copies of the Bid Bond on Document 00 61 00 for the Owner. b. Type or print bidder’s and surety’s names where required. c. Type or print the dollar amount of the Bond where required. The words “5% of the

Bid” are not sufficient and will require re-execution of the Bond. d. Date the Bond prior to the time of the bid opening. e. Type or print the description of the construction in the same language as in the

“Invitation to Bid”. f. Complete the signatures on the form. A corporate bidder shall sign in the following

manner:

By: President, or Florida Resident Agent

The corporate seal must be affixed. Type or print the name of Surety on the line provided and affix its corporate seal.


g. Attach a copy of Surety’s Florida Resident Agent’s Power of Attorney. If not recorded, the copy of the Power of Attorney must have an original signature of the Secretary or Assistant Secretary of the Surety Company certifying to the copy. The Surety’s corporate seal must also be affixed.

C. Submission of Bids

1. At Bid Time: To be considered for the award of contract, two (2) completed and properly executed originals of the following will be required with the bid: a. BID CHECK LIST with Authorized Signature (00 43 93-1) b. BID PROPOSAL FORM (00 41 13) c. BID BOND FORM (00 61 00) d. DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE FORM (00 43 93-2) e. PUBLIC ENTITY CRIME SWORN STATEMENT (00 43 93-3) f. PROOF OF INSURANCE g. INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS (00 31 00) h. CONFIDENTIAL BIDDER QUALIFICATION FORM (00 45 13) i. NON-COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT (00 45 19) j. CERTIFICATE OF CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE (00 62 00) k. BID FORM ATTACHMENT – LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS (00 43 36)

To be accompanied by the following statement: Authorized Signature

:

All companies certify by their signature that they have read and understand the conditions and specifications of the bid and have included all required documents, and that they have the authority, capacity and capability to perform according to conditions and specifications of the bid request. Company Name: (Type or Print) Address: City, State, Zip: Telephone Number: Authorized Signature: Printed Name and Title:

a) All above listed forms shall be in one (1) envelope affixed to the outside of the

envelope containing the two (2) completed and executed PROPOSAL FORMS. The envelope containing the PROPOSAL FORM shall be plainly marked “BID” on the outside along with the following:

TO: AZA HEALTH CENTER

PALATKA, FLORIDA

SUBMITTED BY: (LEGAL NAME AND BUSINESS ADDRESS OF THE BIDDER)

PROPOSAL FOR: ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION 146 COMFORT ROAD PALATKA, FLORIDA 32177

2. If the bid is being sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing

envelope with the notation “BID ENCLOSED” on the face thereof, and shall be delivered to:

Aza Health Attention: Laura Spencer 613 St. Johns Avenue Suite 307 Palatka, FL 32177


3. Sealed bids must be submitted either by mail or personal delivery so that they are in receipt of Aza Health, on or before 4:00 p.m. local time, February 21, 2020. Bids will be clocked in and stamped with the date and time of receipt by an employee of Aza Health. Only those bids receiving a receipt stamp on or before the bid submission deadline will be opened, reviewed and considered.

4. Oral, telephonic, or telegraphic bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 1.5 BID MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL:

A. A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the bidder during the stipulated time period following the opening of bids as described in the “Invitation to Bid”, and the bidder so agrees in submitting his Bid. Negligence on the part of the bidder in preparing the bid confers no right for withdrawal of the bid after it has been opened.

B. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of bids, bids submitted early may be modified or

withdrawn only by notice to the party receiving such bids at the place and prior to the time designated for receipt of bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the bidder or shall be by telegram; if by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the bidder must have been mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids; it shall be so worded as not to revel the amount of the original bid.

C. Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of bids provided that

they are then fully in conformance with the “Instructions to Bidders”.

D. Bid Security shall be in amount sufficient for the bid as modified or resubmitted. 1.6 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

A. Opening of Bids: Unless stated otherwise in the “Invitation to Bid”, the properly identified bids received in time will be opened privately. The designee for the Aza Health will decide the specific time has arrived to open bids and no bids received after that time will be considered. No responsibility nor liability whatsoever will be attached to any Aza Health staff member, Board member, or the Architect for the premature opening of a bid not properly addressed and identified in accordance with the Invitation to Bid.

B. Rejection of Bids:

1. The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all bids and in particular to reject a bid not accompanied by the required bid Security or any data required by the Bid Documents or a bid in any way incomplete or irregular.

2. The Owner shall have the right to reject any bidder who in its opinion has previously failed to perform properly, to complete his work on time, who has habitually and without just cause neglected payments of bills, or otherwise disregarded obligations or whose Surety has failed to meet its obligations on any public construction in the State of Florida.

3. Any or all Proposals may be rejected if there is reason to believe that collusion exists among the bidders and no participants in such collusion will be considered for future Proposals for the same work. Proposals in which the prices obviously are unbalanced may be rejected.

C. Acceptance of the Bid:

1. It is the intent of the Owner to Award a Contract to the lowest responsible bidder provided the bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bid Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive any informality or irregularity in any bid or bids received and to accept the bid or bids which, in his judgment, is in his own best interest.

1.7 AWARD

A. In the event the Contract is awarded to this bidder, the bidder shall enter into a formal written Agreement with the Owner in accordance with the accepted bid within seven (7) calendar days after said Contract is submitted to him and will furnish to the Owner a Contract Performance and Payment Bond with good and sufficient sureties (See Section 01 78 33), satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount of 100% of the accepted bid. The bidder further agrees that in the event of the bidder’s default or breach of any of the Agreements of this proposal, the said Bid Security shall be forfeited. And further, the Owner then may either award the Contract to another responsible bidder, or re-advertise for bids, and may charge against the defaulting bidder the difference between the amount of the bid and the amount for which a Contract for the work is subsequently executed, irrespective of


whether the amount due exceeds the amount of the Bid Bonds. If a more favorable bid is received by advertising, the defaulting bidder shall have no claim against the Owner.

B. The successful bidder for each phase of the Project shall, within seven (7) days of notification of

selection, submit the following information: 1. Percentages of work to be performed by bidder with his own forces. 2. Proprietary names of the suppliers or principal items, or systems of material and equipment

proposed for the work. 3. Insurance Certificates. 4. Submittal and Schedule Outline. 5. Schedule of Values in a form acceptable to the Owner and Architect.

1.8 ADDENDUM

A. Acknowledgment shall be made for receipt of the addenda issued during the Bid period on the Form of Proposal.

1.9 TIME OF COMPLETION

A. The time of completion of the Project is of extreme importance to the Owner. It is highly desirable that the Project Phases be substantially completed at the earliest possible time. See Section 00 31 13.13, Project Schedule. Work shall commence when the Contractor is given written Notice to Proceed. The work shall reach Final Completion within fourteen (14) calendar days after the date of Substantial Completion

B. Time of completion will be written into the basic Contract, unless different times of completion are

mutually agreed upon in writing by the Contractor and Owner prior to the execution of the Contract.

C. The Contractor shall furnish sufficient forces, construction plant and equipment, and to work such hours, including overtime operations, as may be necessary to insure the prosecution of the work, to allow the Substantial Completion and Final Completion of the Project within the specified times. Normal inclement weather will not be sufficient reason to allow an extension of time on the Project. Only exceptional weather conditions, acts of God which might cause delay in the work, or other factors outlined in the Contract Agreement between Owner and Contractor, will be considered justifiable reasons for an extension of time.

D. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the conditions of the basic Contract concerning the time in which the Project is to be completed will be considered by the Owner as a justifiable reason to invoke the conditions of the Contract relating to termination

If awarded this Construction Contract, the bidder agrees to complete the work covered by the

Contract as follows: a. All work for each phase shall be substantially complete as scheduled in the Project Time

Schedule b. Final Completion in fourteen (14) calendar days from Substantial Completion.

D. E. Bidders are informed that the following paragraphs concerning Liquidated Damages will be inserted

into the basic Contract. 1. Failure to complete the project within the time fixed in this Agreement will result in substantial

injury to the Owner, and as damages arising from such failure cannot be calculated with any degree of certainty, according to the definition of Substantial Completion, within the time fixed or within further time if any, as may be authorized in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay the Owner as Liquidated Damages for such delay, and not as penalty, Five Hundred and 00/100 Dollars ($500.00) for each and every calendar day elapsing between the date fixed for Substantial Completion and the date of such Substantial Completion shall have been fully accomplished. These Liquidated Damages shall be payable in addition to any expenses or costs payable by the Contractor to the Owner under the Contract Documents.

If awarded this Construction Contract, the bidder agrees to complete the work covered by the Contract as follows: a. All work on the renovation portion of this project shall be substantially complete within one

hundred twenty (120) calendar days after the Owner’s Notice to Proceed. 1. Final Completion in fifteen (15) calendar days from Substantial Completion.


b. All work on the new construction portion of this project shall be substantially complete within three hundred (300) calendar days after the Owner’s Notice to Proceed 1. Final Completion in fifteen (15) calendar days from Substantial Completion

2. The provision for Liquidated Damages for delay shall in no manner affect the Owner’s right to terminate the Contract, as provided in the Contractor’s Agreement or elsewhere in these Contract Documents and Owner’s exercise of the right to terminate shall not release Contractor from his obligations to pay the Liquidated Damages, the amount hereinbefore set out. The Liquidated Damages shall be payable in addition to any excess expenses or costs payable by the Contractor and shall not exclude recovery of damages by the Owner under other provisions of the Contract, except for Contractor’s delays.

1.10 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND:

A. Owner’s Right to Require Bonds: 1. The Owner shall require the bidder to furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Material

Payment Bond covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder equal to 100% of the Contract amount with such sureties secured through the bidders usual sources as may be agreeable to the parties. The cost shall be included in the Contractor’s Base Bid. a. The Bonds shall be kept current with the full amount of the Contract. b. The Bonds shall extend as a Maintenance Bond for one (1) year after final acceptance

of the Project by the Owner.

B. Time and Delivery and Form of Bonds: 1. The bidder shall deliver the required Bonds to the Owner not later than the date of execution

of the Contract. 2. The Form of the Bonds shall be State Statute 235.32 “Performance Bond” and State Statute

255.05 “Labor and Material Payment Bond” as described hereunder.

C. Execution of the Bonds: 1. The Contractor’s Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bond shall be executed on

behalf of the Contractor in the same manner as the Contract was executed and by the same person or persons who executed the Contract; and it shall not be dated earlier than the Agreement.

2. The Bond must be accompanied by a duly authenticated or certified document evidencing that the person executing the Bond on behalf of the Surety had the authority to do so on the date of the Bond. In the usual case, the conferring of that authority has occurred prior to the date of the Bond; and the document showing date of the appointment and enumeration of the powers of the person executing the Bond is accompanied by a certification that the appointment and powers have not been revoked and remain in effect. The date of that certification cannot be earlier than the date of the Bond.

3. Such certificate must be manually signed or be accompanied by a duly attested Resolution adopted by a Board of Directors, stating that the signatures of the officers and the seal of the company may be affixed to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile; and that such facsimile signature will be valid and binding upon the company.

D. Acceptable Surety Companies:

1. To be acceptable as Surety for Bid Bond and Performance and Payment Bonds, the Surety Company must, at a minimum, comply with the provisions described below. In addition, the Owner may reject any surety due to prior performance issues.

2. The Surety Company must be admitted to do business in the State of Florida and shall have a Florida Resident Agent. a. Where surety bonds are required in the situations described herein, the bonds shall be obtained from companies holding certificates of authority as acceptable to sureties pursuant to 31 CFR part 223, “Surety Companies Doing Business with the United States”. b. All negotiated contracts (except for those less than the simplified acquisition threshold) awarded by recipients shall include a provision to the effect that the recipient, the HHS awarding agency, the U.S. Comptroller General, or any of their authorized representatives, shall have access to any books, documents, papers and records of the Contractor which are directly pertinent to a specific program for the purpose of making audits, examinations, excerpts and transcriptions.

3. The Surety Company shall have been in business and have a record of successful continuous operations for at least five (5) years.

4. The Surety Company shall have at least the following minimum ratings:


a. CONTRACT AMOUNT AND REQUIRED FINANCIAL RATINGS: (Best Financial Rating) $0 to 375,000 BBB $375,001 to 500,000 BBB+ $500,001 to 750,000 AA $750,001 to 1,000,000 AA+ $1,000,001 to 1,250,000 AAA $1,250.001 to 1,500,000 AAA+ $1,500,001 to 2,000,000 AAAA $2,000,001 to 2,500,000 AAAA+ $2,500,001 or more AAAAA

b. Best’s policyholder’s ratings of “A” (which signifies “excellent” based upon good underwriting, economic management, adequate reserves for undisclosed liabilities, net resources for unusual stock and sound investment) or an equivalent rating from the Insurance Commissioner if not rated by Best’s.

5. The Surety Company shall not expose itself to any loss on any risk in an amount exceeding ten percent (10%) of its surplus to policyholders, provided: a. Any risk or portion of any risk which shall have been reinsured (in which case these

minimum requirements contained herein also apply to the reinsuring carrier) in assuming insurer authorized or approved by the Insurance Commissioner to do such business in this State shall be deducted in determining the limitations of risk prescribed in the Section.

b. In the case of a Surety Insurance Company, there shall be deducted, in addition to the deduction for reinsurance, the amount assumed by and co-surety, the value of any security deposited, pledged or held subject to the content of the Surety and for the protection of the Surety.

1.11 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR:

A. Form to be used: Document 00 52 00 Form of Contract, bound herein. 1.12 FLORIDA PRODUCTS AND LABOR

A. The bidder’s attention is called to Section 255.04, Florida Statutes, which requires that on public Bid contracts, Florida products and labor shall be used wherever price and quality are equal.

1.13 TAXES AND PERMITS

A. The Owner is subject to Florida sales and use tax. Any Contractor who purchases materials which will be used in the construction of a building will not be exempted from the sales tax on these materials as evidenced by the following excerpt from the Florida Statutes: “The State, any county, municipality, or political subdivision of this State is exempt from the sales tax, except this exemption shall not include sales of tangible personal property made to Contractors employed either directly or as agent of any such government or political subdivision thereof when such tangible personal property goes into or becomes a part of public works owned by such government or political subdivision thereof.”

B. The Owner is subject to:

1. Federal excise taxes on materials or appliances that are incorporated into and become a part of the completed improvement.

2. Cost of municipal or county building permits.

C. The Owner may furnish certain material and equipment items as outlined in this section.

D. The Contractor is required to obtain all required State of Florida, Clay County and City of Keystone Heights, Florida building permits

1.14 INSURANCE A. Builder’s Risk Insurance: Contractor shall purchase, maintain, and pay for the costs of Builder’s Risk Insurance (fire, extended coverage, vandalism, theft, and malicious mischief) on all construction materials and the buildings or structures in the course of construction. Said Builder’s Risk insurance shall insure to the benefit of Owner and Owner’s interests. Contractor shall be responsible for the loss


of, or damage to, any and all of the Contractor’s personal property; such as tools, equipment, mobile office, etc. B. Liability Insurance: The Contractor will purchase and maintain during the entire time of this Agreement comprehensive general liability and comprehensive automobile liability insurance as shall protect him for property damages which may arise from operations under this Agreement whether such operations be by himself or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by him, and the amounts of such insurance shall be the minimum limits as follows: Bodily Injury and Property Damage: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $5,000 Medical Payments (Any one person) $1,000,000 Personal and Adv. Injury $2,000,000 General Aggregate $2,000,000 Products – Comp/OP Aggregate General Aggregate Limit applies per Product; Products – Comp/OP Aggregate applies per Project; Waiver of Subrogation in favor of Owner Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for one (1) year after final payment Property Damage Liability Insurance will provide X, C and U coverage when such contracts are affected. Owner shall be named as additional insured on all liability insurance. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability: Combined Single Limit Each Accident $1,000,000 -or- Bodily Injury per Person $1,000,000 Bodily Injury per Accident $2,000,000 Property Damage per Accident $1,000,000 Owner shall be named additional insured; Waiver of Subrogation in favor of Owner D. Worker’s Compensation Insurance: Contractor shall take out and maintain, during the life of this Agreement, Worker’s Compensation Insurance in compliance with Chapter 440, Florida Statutes, for all of his employees connected with the work of this project and further, the Contractor shall require his Subcontractors similarly to provide Worker’s Compensation Insurance. In case any class of employee engaged in hazardous work under this Contract at the site of the project is not protected under the Worker’s Compensation Statute, the Contractor shall provide adequate insurance satisfactory to the Owner for the protection of his employees not otherwise protected Required Limits: 1. Worker’s Compensation – Statutory Benefits 2. Employer’s Liability

$1,000,000 each employee Bodily Injury by Accident $1,000,000 each employee Bodily Injury by Disease $1,000,000 policy limit Bodily Injury by Disease

Waiver of Subrogation in favor of Owner E. Anything in the Contract Documents to the contrary notwithstanding and in addition to the insurance required to be maintained by the Contractor as hereinabove set forth, Contractor agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and defend Owner and Architect against any and all claims, loss, damage to or destruction of property including, without limitation, property and employees of Owner, occurring wholly or in part, as the result of work done or omitted to be done by, or contracted to be done but not done by, Contractor or his Subcontractors or the employees or agents or invites either arising from injury to or death of persons or damage to or destruction of property due or claimed to be due, in whole or in part, to any negligence or fault of Owner or its employees, agents, or invites, except claims, loss, damage, costs or expense resulting from risks as are hereinabove required to be insured by Owner.


F. Contractor shall submit to Owner before commencement of work, evidence of the above required insurance, which shall contain certification by the insurance companies that such insurance shall not be cancelled or materially changes until at least ten (10) days prior to written notification being given to the Owner. The Form of Certificate shall be the standard “Accord” form, Certificate of Insurance. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. 1.15 PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to and acceptable to the Architect by the Contractor, the Owner shall make monthly progress payments to the Contractor as provided in the Agreement.

1.16 ENGINEERING:

A. Each bidder must include in his proposal all costs for verifying the suitability of the work by others which affects the Contractor’s work, and to perform all engineering and surveying and field measurements which may be required to complete the work. Destruction and displacement of monuments by the Contractor will make said Contractor liable for all cost to reestablish the monument.

B. Basic reference points and bench marks will be provided by Owner. Subsequent surveying and field measurements from these points will be the responsibility of each Contractor.

1.17 BID PROTESTS

A. Bid protests filed pursuant to Florida Statutes 120.57 shall be served upon Bo Brewer, 613 St. Johns Avenue, Suite 307, Palatka, Florida 32177, via certified mail. Bid protests may be preliminarily filed, if followed by a certified mail original, via facsimile transmittal to Mr. Brewer at 386.325.1086. Bid protests must be accompanied by a cost deposit of five thousand dollars ($5,000.00) or one percent of the total contract price, whichever is greater.

B. In the event the protesting party is not the prevailing party, as a result of final agency action taken pursuant to 120.57, said cost deposit shall be retained by Aza Health to defray its costs, expenses and fees, including reasonable attorney's fees with respect to their participation in the bid protest process. Furthermore, the unsuccessful protester shall be responsible to Aza Health for all other and additional reasonable fees, expenses and costs, in the event the deposit which Aza Health retains pursuant to this paragraph is insufficient to reimburse Aza Health for all costs and fees incurred.

1.18 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Contractor’s attention is directed to Section 01 74 13, 1.8 B of this manual. The special cleaning requirement must be adhered to during the course of construction.

1.19 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Substantial Completion is the stage in progress of the work when the work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the work for its intended use.

B. When the Contractor considers that the work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept

separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected. The contractor shall proceed promptly to complete and correct items on the list. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architects’ inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. The Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.

C. When the work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a

Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall


commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.

D. Upon Substantial Completion of the work or designated portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, the Owner shall make payment, reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, for such work or portion thereof as provided in the Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 65 19.16 - CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE AND RELEASE OF LIEN 00 65 19.16-1

SECTION 00 65 19.16

FORM OF CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATE AND RELEASE OF LIEN

CERTIFICATE AND RELEASE

FROM: TO: Rural Health Care, Inc. dba Aza Health Center, Palatka RE: CONTRACT ENTERED INTO THE DAY OF 20 BETWEEN THE: Rural Health Care, Inc. dba Aza Health, Palatka HEREINAFTER CALLED THE OWNER AND (Name of Contractor) OF (city) (state) HEREINAFTER CALLED THE CONTRACTOR FOR (Type of Construction)

K N O W A L L M E N B Y T H E S E P R E S E N T S:

1. The undersigned hereby certifies that there is due and payable under the Contract and duly approved Change Orders and modifications the undisputed balance of $ . 2. The undersigned further certifies that in addition to the amount set forth in Paragraph 1 hereof, there are outstanding and unsettled the following items which he claims are just and due owing by the Local Authority to the Contractor: (Itemize claims and amounts claimed. If none, so state.) 3. The undersigned further certifies that all work required under this contract including work required under Change Orders numbered has been performed in accordance with the terms thereof, and that there are no claims of laborers or mechanics for unpaid wages arising out of the performance of this contract and that the wage rates paid by the Contractor and all Subcontractors were in conformity with the contract provisions relating to said wage rates. 4. Except for the amount stated in paragraphs 1 and 2 hereof the undersigned has received from the Owner all sums of money payable to the undersigned under or pursuant to the aforementioned contract or any change or modification thereof. 5. That in consideration of the payment of the amount stated in paragraph 1 hereof the undersigned does hereby release the Owner from any and all claims arising under or by virtue of this contract except the amounts listed in paragraph 2 hereof; provided, however, that if for any reason the Owner does not pay in full the amount stated in paragraph 1 hereof, said deduction shall not affect the validity of this release, but the amount so deducted shall be automatically included under paragraph 2 as an amount which the Contractor has not released but will release upon payment thereof. The Contractor further certifies that upon payment of the amounts listed in paragraph 2 hereof, and of any amount which may be deducted from paragraph 1 hereof, he will release the Owner from any and all claims of any nature whatsoever arising out of said contract or modification thereof, and will execute such further releases or assurances as the Owner may request. 6. This affidavit is executed by the Contractor in accordance with Section 713.06 of the Florida Statutes for the purpose of obtaining final payment from the Owner.


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has signed and sealed this instrument this day of 20 . (Seal) (Contractor) (Signature and Title) , being first and duly sworn on oath, deposes and says, first, that is the of the ,

second, that he has read the foregoing

Certificate of Release by him subscribed as of the Affiant further states that the matters and things stated therein are, to the best of his knowledge and belief, true.

(Signature of Affiant) Subscribed before me this day of , 20 : Notary: My Commission expires:


PARTIAL RELEASE OF LIEN KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the undersigned, for and in consideration of the payment of the sum of $ , paid by receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, hereby releases and quit claims to the said party, its successors and assigns, and the Owner, all liens, lien rights, claims or demands of any kind whatsoever, which the undersigned now has or might have against the building or premises legally described as: on account of labor performed and/or material furnished for the construction of any improvements thereon. That all labor and material used by the undersigned in the erection of said improvements have been fully paid for. Nature of Work: IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand seal this day of , 20 .

Company Name:

Tax ID No.:

By:

WITNESS: State of County of I hereby acknowledge that the statements contained in the foregoing Release of Lien are true and correct.

(Signature)

Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of , 20 .

SEAL

Notary

My Commission Expires

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 00 72 13 – GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 13-1

SECTION 00 72 13

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. AIA Document A201, General Conditions, 2017 Edition, Articles 1-15 inclusive, are hereby made a full part of the Contract Documents and will be the General Conditions for this work. B. AIA Documents A201 may be purchased from the Florida Association of the American Institute of Architects, (AIA Florida), 104 East Jefferson Street, Tallahassee, Florida, tel: 904-222-7590, fax: 904- 224-8048, or may be examined at the Architect’s office. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not used)

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 11 00 – SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-1

SECTION 01 11 00

SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK A. General Conditions – 00 72 13

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The work to be performed under this contract consists of that work defined in the Contract Documents for the Administration Building Renovation and Addition. The Owner occupy portions of the building during the construction of this project once those areas are completed.

1.3 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Designate submittals and delivery date for each product. B. Review shop drawings, product data, samples, and other submittals. Submit to the Architect with notification due to non-conformance with Contract Documents. Shop drawings that are not reviewed by the Contractor shall be returned. C. Receive and unload products at site D. Inspect deliveries, record shortages, and damaged or defective items and inform the Architect. E. Coordination of Work 1. The General Contractor and Subcontractors shall review other sections of work applicable to their work and ascertain requirements in other sections applicable to their work. Each shall be held responsible for coordination and inclusion of the work indicated as it were in the particular subcontractor's section. The Architect shall be advised of any discrepancies or conflicts at the earliest moment.

2. All subcontractors, suppliers, etc., shall be responsible for knowing what information is given on all sheets of the plans and specifications concerning his particular work.

F. Effect of Addenda, Amendments, Bulletins, Deletions, Omissions and Change Orders

1. No special implication, interpretation, in construction, connotation, denotation, import, or meaning shall be assigned to any provision of the Contract Documents because of changes created by the issuance of any (1) addendum, (2) amendment, (3) bulletin, (4) notice of other than the precise meaning that the contract documents would have had if the provision thus created had read originally as it reads subsequently to the (1) addendum, (2) amendment, (3) bulletin, (4) notice of deletion, (5) notice of omission, or (6) change order by which it was created.

G. Contract Forms and Requirements

1. Forms, requirements and documents included under Division 1 of this Project Manual together with the Table of Contents are a part of the Contract Documents.

2. Drawing sheets as identified on Index to Drawings are a part of the Contract Document 3. Documents, affidavits, and printed forms included in the Contract Documents are required by the Owner. 4. The requirement of Division 1 applies to all Divisions and Sections of the Project Manual as if

reproduced therein.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 21 00 – ALLOWANCES 01 21 00-1

SECTION 01 21 00

ALLOWANCES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions and Explanations: Certain requirements of the work related to each allowance are shown and specified in the Contract Documents. The allowance has been established in lieu of additional requirements for that work, and further requirements thereof (if any) will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances scheduled herein for the Work include the following: 1. Lump sum allowances (Purchase Only) C. Selection and Purchase: At earliest feasible data after award of Contract, advise Architect of scheduled date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by each allowance must be accomplished in order to avoid delays in performance of the Work. 1. As requested by the Architect, obtain and submit proposals for the work of each allowance for use in making final selections. 2. Purchase products and systems as specifically selected (in writing) by the Architect/Engineer. D. Change Order Data: Where applicable, include in each Change Order Proposal both the quantities of products being purchased and unit costs, along with total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey of requirements data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charge and amounts of applicable trade discounts. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Purchase and Installation of Allowance Items: Purchase and Installation cost for all allowance items shall be included in the Base Bid. 1. Exterior Decorative Light Fixtures: Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000)

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS 01 30 00-1

SECTION 01 30 00

ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Work covered by Contract Documents. B. Contract method. C. Alternates. D. Applications for payment and close out. E. Coordination. F. Progress Cleaning.

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Contract Documents were prepared to reflect work for this Project. 1.3 CONTRACT METHOD

A. Work to be constructed by the Contractor will be contracted under lump sum Contracts.

1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Contractor shall be required to submit his own applications for payment and closeout material in accordance with Sections 00 50 00 and 01 77 00.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall be required to coordinate the Work of his own trade to special and functional requirements in accordance with Section 01 31 00.

B. The Owner's Maintenance Manager will coordinate scheduling and interrelation between Work of

Contractor and that by Owner's forces, if any.

1.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Contractor shall be responsible for progress cleaning behind his own forces in accordance with Section 01 74 13.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 31 00 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00-1

SECTION 01 31 00

PROJECT MANAGEMENT & COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Coordination of work of the Contract.

B. Project Coordination

C. Construction Mobilization

D. Schedules

E. Submittals

F. Coordination Drawings

G. Closeout Procedures 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Document 00 72 13 - General Conditions: Contractor's Responsibility for Field Verifications. B. Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work C. Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination D. Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching. E. Section 01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements F. Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements G. Section 01 77 00 - Contract Closeout Procedures: Closeout Submittals.

1.3 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Project Coordination Manager: Laura Spencer 1.4 DESCRIPTION

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various Sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items to be installed later.

B. Cooperate with the Coordination Manager in allocation of mobilization area of site; for field offices and sheds, for unit access, traffic, and parking facilities.

C. Coordinate use of site, temporary utilities and facilities through Coordination Manager.

D. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Architect. 1.5 MEETINGS

A. In addition to Progress Meetings, hold coordination meetings and Pre-Installation Conferences with personnel and subcontractors to assure coordination of the work.

1.6 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in Section 01 32 19.


B. Submit preliminary progress schedule, coordinated with construction schedule. During progress of work, revise and resubmit schedule with Applications for Payment.

C. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to,

and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, of operating elements, and

affect on work of others.

E. Submit product data and samples in accordance with Section 01 32 19 for review and compliance with Contract Documents, for field dimensions and clearances, for relation to available space, and for relation to work of separate contracts. Revise and resubmit as required.

F. Applications for Payment shall be submitted to the Architect.

G. Submit requests for interpretations of Contract Documents and obtain instructions through the Architect.

H. Process requests for substitutions and change orders through the Architect.

I. Deliver closeout submittals to the Architect.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS A. Provide information required by Architect for preparation of coordination and construction phasing.

Construction phasing and allowable work times in certain areas must be closely coordinated with the Owner’s operation schedule and the Owner’s requirements.

B. Review drawings prior to submission to Architect. C. Aza Health’s hours of operation are Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. 1.8 COORDINATION OF EQUIPMENT AND SPACE

A. Verify the dimensions and quantities indicated on the drawings and in the Specifications under the provisions of Section 00 72 13. Notify Architect of apparent discrepancies under the provisions of Section 00 72 13, Article 19. The drawings are diagrammatically representational and shall not be scaled where drawn at less than 1/4 full size (3”=1’–0”). Contact the Architect for any required dimensions not shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that utility requirements of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities.

Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing such equipment.

C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are shown

diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing shown from pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Install to maximize space for other installations, for maintenance, for repairs, and to provide required clearances to conform to referenced mechanical and electrical codes.

D. In finished areas, except where otherwise shown, conceal all new pipes, conduits, ducts, and wiring

within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements and the Architect.

1.9 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion of portions of work identified for the Owner’s partial occupancy.

B. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. Accompany Architect on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in Contractor's notice of Substantial Completion.


C. Comply with Architect’s instructions to correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and for access to Aza Health occupied areas.

D. After the Owner’s occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work

and work not conforming to Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of the Owner's activities.

E. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete. Accompany Architect on preliminary Final Inspection.

F. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified in Section 01 77 00.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 31 19 – PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1

SECTION 01 31 19

PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section covers the requirements for attendance at meetings needed for coordination of the

project. 1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. A Pre-construction Conference will be held after NOTICE OF AWARD and before the NOTICE TO

PROCEED; the date, time, and location will be determined after NOTICE OF AWARD. B. The conference shall be attended by: 1. Contractor and Contractor’s Superintendent. 2. Subcontractors 3. Architect 4. Owner 5. Others as requested by Contractor, Owner or Architect. C. Unless previously submitted to Owner, Contractor shall bring the construction schedule, Shop

Drawings, and other submittals required by the Contract Documents. D. The purpose of the Pre-construction Conference is to designate responsible personnel and establish

working relationships. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The agenda will include, but not be limited to, discussion on:

1. Contractor’s schedule. 2. Any applicable permit applications. 3. Status of Bonds, insurance, and Contract Documents. 4. Transmittal, review, and distribution of Contractor’s submittals. 5. Processing applications for payment. 01 29 00 6. Maintaining record documents. 7. Critical work sequencing. 8. Utility Coordination and Schedule Impacts. 9. Suppliers and Subcontractors. 10. Surveying. 11. Material Testing. 12. Personnel Responsibilities and Communications. 13. Storm Water Management Plan, if applicable 14. Change Order Proposals, Construction Change Directives and Change Orders 15. Use of premises, office and storage areas, staging area, security, and housekeeping. 16. Major product delivery and priorities. 17. Contractor’s safety and first aid plan and representative. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Progress meetings will be conducted at a frequency determined by Architect. These meetings shall be

attended by Owner, Architect, Contractor’s representative and any others invited by these people. B. Contractor will conduct the meeting and arrange for keeping the minutes and distributing the minutes

to all persons in attendance within three (3) calendar days after the meeting. C. The agenda will include discussion on construction progress, schedule updates, the status of submittal

reviews, the status of requests for information, critical work sequencing, review of strategies for connections into existing facilities, status of Change Order Proposals, and any general business.

1.4 OTHER MEETINGS A. In accordance with Contract Documents and as may be required by Owner or Architect

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 32 19 – SUBMITTALS 01 32 19-1

SECTION 01 32 19

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures B. Construction progress schedules C. Proposed products list D. Shop Drawings E. Product Data F. Samples G. Manufacturer’s Instructions H. Manufacturer’s Certificates 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 00 50 00 – Contract Considerations B. Section 01 40 00 – Quality Control 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Forward each submittal to Architect with transmittal form containing the following information: 1. Project Identification, including project number, Architect’s Project Number, Contractor, subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing sheet and detail number(s). and Specification Section number, as appropriate. 2. State whether the submittal deviates from the Contract Documents. B. Within 15 days after the date of the Notice to Proceed, submit the number of copies of initial Construction Progress Schedule, Schedule of Amounts for Contract Payments, Proposed Products List, shop drawings, product data, manufacturer’s instructions and certificates which Contractor requires, plus four copies which will be retained by the Architect. Where number of copies required by the Architect, plus at least one to return to the Contractor is not received, such as e-mail transmissions, the Contractor will be billed for the Architect’s cost of reproduction. C. Apply Contractor’s stamp signed or initialed certifying that the Contractor’s review verification of products required, field dimensions, adjoining construction work and coordination information, meets requirements of the Contract Documents. D. Coordinate submission of related items. E. Identify variations from Contract Documents. Identify product system limitations which may be detrimental to successful completion of the Work due to those variations. F. Provide space for Architect’s review stamp. G. Shop drawings, product data, manufacturer’s instructions and manufacturer’s certificates failing to conform to the requirements of this Section will be returned without review. Shop drawings must be readable – faxes or faxed submissions will not be accepted. H. Corrections or comments made in the shop drawings during review do not relieve the Contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. Review for the general conformance with the design concept of the Project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The Contractor is responsible for confirming and correlation of all quantities and dimensions, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating work of all


trades and performing all work in a safe and satisfactory manner. The Contractor shall verify and be responsible for all related documents and job conditions on the Project. Review does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error which may exist. Modifications made by the Architect are to effect an improvement for the Project and are ordered with the understanding that they do not involve any change in the Contract Price or Time. I. Revise and resubmit as required, identify changes made since previous submittal. Direct specific attention, in writing, on re-submittals to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to report promptly inability to conform to provisions. K. Notify Architect in writing of completion of submittal, review and approval of all required shop drawings, product data and manufacturer’s certificates. On receipt of this notification, Architect will review the requirements specified in the Specifications and concur or request any additional material required. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit revised schedules with each Periodical Estimate for Partial Payment, identifying changes since previous version. B. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major division of work, identifying first work day of each week. C. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Identify the early and late start, early and late finish, and duration. D. Designate estimated percentage of completion for each item of work at each submission. 1.5 PROPOSED PRODUCT LIST A. Submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number for use with each product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation and reference standards. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each shop drawing shall include: 1. Descriptive title and drawing number 2. Brief description of the work involved 3. Project Number and Name 4. Contractor’s and subcontractor’s (if applicable) name 5. Evidence of the Contractor’s review and approval B. Use qualified detailer for preparation of shop drawings. C. Submit opaque prints D. Minimum sheet size 8” x 10” E Scale: sufficient to show pertinent features of item and affected adjoining work. F. After review, distribute under Procedures in this Section and for Record Documents described in Section 01 78 39. 1.7 PRODUCT DATA A. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options and other data. Supplement manufacturer’s routine data to provide information unique to this Project.


B. Mark dimensions and clearance requirements, performance characteristics, capabilities, wiring and controls as pertinent. C. After review, distribute under Procedures in this Section and for Record Documents described in Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents. 1.8 SAMPLE A. Submit samples to show functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. B. Submit samples of finishes from a full range of manufacturer’s standard colors, textures and patterns for Architects selection. All submittals requiring color selection shall be submitted at the same time to allow for coordination of color selections. C. Include the identification on each sample, with full Project information. D. Submit the number of samples specified in individual Specification Sections; two samples will be retained by the Architect. E. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work, if they remain intact after testing by the Architect, are identified in individual Specification Sections. 1.9 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer’s printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting and finishing in quantities specified in Product Data. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturer’s instructions and Contract Documents. 1.10 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer’s certificate to Architect for review under the provisions of Section 00 72 13, article 24. B. Attest material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product where no exception is taken by the Architect. D. When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifications.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION DOCUMENT 0 1 35 00 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01 35 00-1

DOCUMENT 01 35 00

SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. PROJECT SITE a. The site of the Project is located at 146 Comfort Road, Palatka, FL 32177, within the limits of Putnam

County. 2. TIME FOR COMPLETION a. Renovation – 120 calendar days to Substantial Completion b. Addition – 300 days to Substantial Completion 3. PERMITS AND LICENSES

a. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, fees, licenses, etc., required to perform business transactions in the State of Florida, Putnam County.

4. EXISTING CONDITIONS a. The Contractor shall visit the project location and thoroughly familiarize himself with all of the existing

conditions. b. No extras will be allowed for items obviously necessary for the completion of the work but not specifically

called out in the Specifications. 5. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

a. Technical Specifications shall control over Plans, schedules shall control over general plans, large scale details over small scale and figure dimensions. Scaled dimensions shall not be allowed. Addenda and Change Orders supersede only affected portions of the Documents.

b. The term “furnish” includes purchase and delivery to Project Site. The term “install” includes receiving, unloading, and storing at Project Site, installing in place, and placing in operation or finishing complete for intended use.

c. The Drawings are intended to show the general arrangements, design and extent of the work, and are partly diagrammatic; they are not intended to be called for rough-in measurements, or to serve as Shop Drawings.

d. Should the Drawings disagree in themselves or with the Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work or materials shall be furnished unless otherwise ordered in writing by the Architect.

e. Where a typical or representative detail is shown on the Drawings, this detail shall constitute the standard in workmanship and materials throughout corresponding parts of the work; adaptation, however, shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.

6. PREFERENCE TO THE HOME INDUSTRIES a. The Contractor agrees that, pursuant to Section 255.04, Florida Statutes preference will be given in

the purchase of material and in the letting of contracts for the construction of this project to residents of the state whenever such material can be purchased or services can be obtained if such purchase was made or contract let to a person or firm doing business beyond the limits of the state, provided that the quality of materials, qualifications, character, responsibility, and fitness be equal.

7. JOB OFFICES a. The Contractor may, at his option, furnish and maintain, during construction of the project, office and

storage facilities at the site. b. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain sanitary toilet facilities. Location to be determined by Owner.

c. The Contractor and his subcontractors may maintain such office and storage facilities on the site as may be necessary in the proper conduct of the work. These shall be located so as to cause no interference to any work to be performed on the site. The Owner shall be consulted with regard to locations.

d. Upon completion of the project, or as directed by the Owner or Architect, the Contractor shall remove all such temporary structures and facilities from the site, same to become his property, and leave the premises in the condition required by the Contract.

8. COMMUNICATIONS a. All notices, demands, requests, instructions, approvals, proposals, and claims must be in writing. b. Any notice to or demand upon the Contractor shall be sufficiently given if delivered at the office of the

Contractor stated on the signature page of the Contract or at such other office as he may from time to time designate in writing to the Owner or deposited in the United States mail in a sealed, postage-prepaid envelope, or if delivered with charges prepaid to any telegraph company for transmission, in each case addressed to such office.


c. All papers required to be delivered to the Owner or Architect shall, unless otherwise specified in writing to the Contractor, be delivered to Aza Health at 613 St. Johns Avenue, Suite 307 Palatka, Florida 32177

d. Any such notice shall be deemed to have been given as of the time of actual delivery; or, in the case of mailing, when the same should have been received in due course of post; or, in the case of telegrams, at the time of actual receipt.

, and any notice to or demand upon the Owner or Architect shall be sufficiently given if so delivered, or deposited in the United States mail in a sealed, postage-prepaid envelope, or delivered with charges prepaid to any telegraph company for transmission to said Authority or Architect at such address, or to such other representatives of the Owner may subsequently specify in writing to the Contractor for such purpose.

e. All day to day communication with the Owner shall be as follows:

Laura Spencer, CEO Tel: 386-326-7340

f. If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the work in accordance with the Contract

Documents, and fails within seventy-two (72) hours after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may make good such deficiencies. In such case and appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor at a cost of correcting such deficiencies including compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and the amount charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.

g. Should the Architect or Owner find any person(s) employed on the project to be incompetent, unfit, or otherwise objectionable for his duties and so certified the facts to the Contractor, the Contractor shall immediately cause the employee to be dismissed and said employee shall not be re-employed on this project without the written consent of the Architect and Owner.

9. SUBSTITUTIONS

a. Except where limitations on approved products pursuant to Florida Statute 255.04(1) appear elsewhere in the Contract, when reference is made in the Contract Documents to trade names or manufacturers, such references are made solely to indicated that products of the description may be furnished and are not intended to restrict competitive bidding. If it is desired to use products of trade or brand names or of manufacturer’s names which are different from those mentioned in the Contract Documents, application for the approval of the use of such products must be in receipt of the Architect at least seven (7) days prior to the opening of Bids

b. Unless requests for approvals of other products have been received and approvals have been published by addendum in accordance with the above procedure, the successful Bidder may furnish no

. The latter provision is a restriction which applies only to the party making the submittal. Therefore, the aforesaid restriction does not inhibit the Architect from adding trade names or names, brand names or names, or manufacturers by addendum. The burden of proving acceptability of a proposed product for use in place of a product or products designated by trade name or names, brand name or names or by the name or names of manufacturers in the Contract Documents rests on the party submitting the request for approval. The written application for approval of a proposed product must be accompanied by technical data which the party requesting approval desires to submit in support of his application. The Architect will give consideration to reports from reputable independent testing laboratories, verified experience records showing the reputation of the proposed product with previous users, evidence of reputation of the manufacturer for prompt delivery, evidence of reputation of the manufacturer for efficiency in servicing its products, or any other written information that is helpful in the circumstances. The application to the Architect for approval of a proposed product must be accompanied by a schedule setting forth in which respects the materials or equipment submitted for consideration differ from the materials or equipment designated in the Contract Documents. The degree of proof required for approval of a proposed product as acceptable for use in place of a named product or named products is that amount of proof necessary to convince a reasonable person beyond all doubt. To be approved, a proposed product must also meet or exceed all express requirements of the Contract Documents. If the submittal is approved by the Architect an addendum will be issued to all prospective Bidders. Issuance of and addendum is the representation to all Bidders that the Architect in the exercise of his professional discretion established the product submitted for approval is acceptable and meets or exceeds all express requirements. In order for the Architect to prepare an addendum intelligently, the application for approval of a product must be accompanied by a copy of the published recommendations of the manufacturer of the product in accordance with the recommendations of the ,manufacturer of the product. (See Article 3.14, AIA General Conditions which required that the Contractor do all cutting and fitting that may be required to make the several parts of his work come together properly and fit).


products of any trade names, brand names, or manufacturers’ names except those designated in the Contract Documents with exception of changes or substitutions that may be affected via Change Order in accordance with Article 12 of the AIA General Conditions. Any party who alleges that rejection of a submittal is the result of bias, prejudice, caprice or error on the part of the Architect/Engineer may request a conference with a representative of the Owner, provided: That the request for said conference, submitted in writing, shall have reached the Owner at least five days prior to the date set for opening Bids, time being of the essence. By making request for substitutions based on Clause 4.5.1 above, the Contractor: 1. represents that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute and determined that it

is equal or superior in all respects to that specified; 2. represents that he will provide the same warranty for the substitution that he would for that

specified; 3. certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related cost under this

Contract but excludes costs under separate contracts, and excludes the Architect’s/Engineer’s redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently became apparent and;

4. will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the work to be completed in all respects.

10. BUILDING PERMIT

a. The Contractor is required to secure all building permits. 11. SITE STORAGE

a. The Contractor shall confine his equipment, storage of materials, and operations of his workmen to limits directed by the Architect. Materials shall not be brought onto the site until reasonably required for the progress of the work. Storage space will be confined to a designated area of the site. When the site is not in a condition to receive a material shipment, the Contractor shall have materials properly stored elsewhere at no additional cost to the Owner. No payment for materials shall be made unless material is stored on site.

b. Material shall be arranged and maintained in an orderly manner with use of walks, drives, roads and entrances unencumbered. Store, place and handle material and equipment delivered to Project Site so as to preclude inclusion of foreign substances or causing discoloration. Pile neatly and completely and barricade to protect public from injury. Protect material as required to prevent damage from ground or weather. Should it be necessary to move material at any time, or move sheds or storage platforms, Contractor shall move them as and when required at no additional cost to the Owner. The Owner assumes no responsibility for stored materials in building or on site. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for damage due to storing of materials. Repairing of areas used for the placing of sheds, offices, and storage of materials shall be done by Contractor.

12. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT

a. Communications Facilitating Contract Administration: Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and the Contractor shall endeavor to communicate through the Architect. Communications by and with subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner.

b. Based on the Architect’s observations and evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue certificates for Payment in such amounts.

c. The Architect will have the authority to reject work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the work, whether or not such work is fabricated, installed, or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the work.

d. The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor’s submittals such as shop drawings, product data and samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgement to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of


contractual obligations. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.

e. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives and may authorize minor changes in the work.

f. The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion, will receive and forward to the Owner for review and records written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

g. If the Owner and the Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site.

h. The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or the Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 16, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them.

i. Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results or interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith.

j. The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.

13. PROJECT MEETINGS

a. Project meetings will be held at times designated by the Architect after conference with the Contractor. Contractor and designated Subcontractors must attend these meetings. If the principal of the firm does not attend meetings, the individual representing the firm must be a responsible representative of the company who can bind the company to a decision at the meeting.

14. CHANGES IN THE WORK

a. The cost of all changes in the work shall be substantiated by complete itemized statements showing quantities and unit prices for material, labor (including all fringe benefits), equipment and other items of cost. Costs of labor (including all applicable fringe benefits) and materials shall be actual costs to the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit receipts or other evidences, as the Architect may direct, showing his actual costs and his rights to the payment claims.

b. The maximum percentage of profit and overhead which may be added to actual costs of changes in the work shall be as follows:

c. For work done by his own organization, the Contractor may add ten percent (10%) of his actual costs. d. For work done by Subcontractors, the respective Subcontractor may add ten percent (10%) of their

costs and the Contractor may add ten percent (10%) of the above Subcontractor’s total. e. Overhead shall include the following: Supervision, wages or time-keepers, watchmen and clerks,

hand tools, incidentals, general office expense, and all other expenses not included in “cost”. f. Authorization for changes in the work shall be made in writing by the Architect and the Owner, and no

claim for a revision of the Contract Sum shall be valid unless so authorized. g. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, cost shall be limited to the following: cost of

material at the trade discount cost, including sales tax and cost of delivery; cost of labor, including Social Security, old age and unemployment insurance, and fringe benefits required by agreement of custom; workers’ compensation insurance; bond premium not exceed one percent (1%); rental value of equipment and machinery at trade discount cost plus sales tax and the additional cost of supervision directly attributable to the change only if the change (or total time extension of all changes) results in an extension of the contract time for more than thirty days. The bond premium of all credit amounts shall be added to the total credit allowed the Owner. No bond cost shall be allowed for a Subcontractor’s bond cost.

15. TIME:

a. The Contractor shall furnish sufficient forces, construction plant and equipment, and shall work such hours as may be necessary to insure prosecution of the work in accordance with the approved progress schedule set forth in Section 00 31 13.13. If the Contractor falls behind the progress schedule, he shall take such steps as may be necessary or as may be directed by the Owner to improve his progress by increasing the number of shifts, overtime operations, days of work, and the amount of construction plant, as may be required, at no additional cost to the Owner.


b. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements under this provision shall be grounds for determination that the Contractor is not prosecuting the work with such diligence as will insure completion within the time specified and such failure constitutes a substantial violation of the conditions of the Agreement.

c. As actual damages for any delay in completion are impossible to determine, the Contractor shall be liable for and shall pay to the Owner the sum of Five Hundred Dollars

($500.00) per calendar day of delay until the work is completed and accepted.

16. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION a. The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days from the date of Notice of Award and prior to first

application for payment, submit to the Architect three (3) copies of a correct and completely itemized schedule of contract values which will reflect the cost of each subdivision of work each specification section. The value of each item shall include a true proportionate amount of the Contractor’s overhead and profit. The sum of all such scheduled values shall equal the Contract sum as evidenced by the Agreement. If requested, the Contractor shall submit substantiating data for schedule of contract values will accompany and support the Contractor’s periodic applications for payment and shall indicate the value of suitable stored material as well as labor performed and materials incorporated into the work for each subdivision of the schedule during the period for which the requisition is prepared.

b. Ten percent (10%) of each payment will be retained until the Contract, including Change Orders, is complete. After Substantial Completion has been achieved, the retainage is reduced to five percent (5%). Payments of the amounts retained will be due fifteen (15) days after final acceptance by the Owner.

c. Final payment shall be made to the Contractor as provided by the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. Application for final payment shall be in the same form as application for progress payments and shall be accompanied by the following additional items:

d. Completed and notarized waivers and releases of lien in a form acceptable to the Architect and Owner. e. Such other data and substantiating information as may be required elsewhere in these Contract

Documents including but not limited to all required guarantees, warranties, operating and maintenance manuals, As-Built Drawings, or as may be required by the Owner or Architect and as described in DIVISION 1, SECTION 01 77 00 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

f. Consent of Surety. 17. INSURANCE

a. Builder’s Risk Insurance: Owner shall purchase, maintain, and pay for the costs of Builder’s Risk Insurance (fire, extended coverage, vandalism, theft, and malicious mischief) on all construction materials and the buildings or structures in the course of construction. Said Builder’s Risk insurance shall insure to the benefit of Owner and Owner’s interests. Said Builder’s Risk insurance shall be subject to a $5,000.00 (five thousand dollars) “deductible” clause. Contractor shall be responsible for paying for any and all losses up to said $5,000.00 deductible, excluding any loss which is the result of natural causes. Contractor shall be responsible for the loss of, or damage to, any and all of Contractor’s personal property; such as tools, equipment, mobile office, etc.

b. Extended Coverage: The usual form currently available and covering perils of windstorm, hail, explosive, riot and civil commotion, damage from aircraft and vehicles and smoke damage.

c. Liability Insurance: The Contractor will purchase and maintain during the entire time of this Agreement comprehensive general liability and comprehensive automobile liability insurance as shall protect him from claims for property damages which may arise from operations under this Agreement whether such operations be by himself or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by him, and the amounts of such insurance shall be the minimum limits as follows:

d. Comprehensive General Liability including Personal Injury, Products Completed Operations Coverage, Independent Contractor’s Protective, and Contractual Liability.

Bodily Injury and Property Damage:

$1,000,000 General Aggregate $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $1,000,000 Products/Completed Operations

Personal Injury Liability: $1,000,000

Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for one (1) year after final payment.

Property Damage Liability Insurance will provide X, C, and U coverage when such contracts are affected. Owner shall be named as additional insured on all liability insurance.


e. Comprehensive Automobile Liability:

Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence Property Damage: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence Contractor shall provide to the OWNER, proof of Insurance on all Contractors’ vehicles operating on

OWNER’S property.

f. Worker’s Compensation Insurance: Contractor shall take out and maintain, during the life of this Agreement, Worker’s Compensation Insurance in compliance with Chapter 440, Florida Statutes, for all of his employees connected with the work of this project and further, the Contractor shall require his Subcontractors similarly to provide Worker’s Compensation Insurance. In case any class of employee engaged in hazardous work under this Contract at the site of project is not protected under the Workmen’s Compensation Statute, the Contractor shall provide, adequate insurance satisfactory to the Owner for the protection of his employees not otherwise protected.

Required Limits:

1. Worker’s Compensation - Statutory Benefits 2. Employer’s Liability

$1,000,000 each employee Bodily Injury by accident $1,000,000 each employee Bodily Injury by disease

$1,000,000 policy limit Bodily Injury by disease

g. Anything in the Contract Documents to the contrary notwithstanding and in addition to the insurance required to be maintained by the Contractor as hereinabove set forth, Contractor agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and defend Owner and Architect against any and all claims, loss, damage to or destruction of property including, without limitation, property and employees of Owner, occurring wholly or in part, as the result of work done or omitted to be done by, or contracted to be done but not done by, Contractor or his Subcontractors or the employees or agents or invites either arising from injury to or death of persons or damage to or destruction of property due or claimed to be due, in whole or in part, to any negligence or fault of Owner or its employees, agents, or invites, except claims, loss, damage, costs or expense resulting from risks as are hereinabove required to be insured by Owner.

h. Contractor shall submit to Owner before commencement of work, evidence of the above require insurance, which shall contain certification by the insurance companies that such insurance shall not be cancelled or materially changed until at least ten (10) days prior to written notification being given to the Owner. The Form of Certificate shall be the standard “Accord” form, Certificate of Insurance. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits.

18. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

a. If, after the approval of final payments and prior to expiration of one (1) year thereafter, or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, any work is found to be defective, it shall be repaired by the Contractor. In the case of an emergency, brought about by defective work of the Contractor, the Owner may proceed immediately to make the necessary repairs and charge the cost of same to the Contractor without giving any notice to the Contractor.

19. TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT

TERMINATION BY THE OWNER a. If the Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt, or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors,

or if a receiver is appointed on account of the Contractor’s insolvency, or if the Contractor persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials, or fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or if the Contractor: 1. Fails to correct, replace and/or re-execute faulty or defective work and/or materials furnished

under this Agreement; or 2. Fails to complete or diligently proceed with the Work required by this Agreement, within the

time constraints of the construction schedule maintained by the Architect; or 3. Fails to correct or repair any damage to Work caused by him or his failure to protect his Work

or the work of others; or


4. Fails to provide safe and sufficient facilities, orderly premises and the cleanup of the Work required under this Agreement; or

5. Is unable to proceed with the Work because of any action by one or more employees of the Trade Contractor or by a person or labor organization supporting or attempting to represent any employees of the Trade Contractor; or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of the provision of the Contract Documents, and fails within 72 hours after receipt of written notice to commence and continue correction of such default, neglect or violation with diligence and promptness, the Owner, upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the site and all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the Work by whatever methods the Owner may deem expedient. In such case, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished.

END OF DOCUMENT

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 40 00 – QUALITY CONTROL 01 40 00-1

SECTION 01 40 00

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality Assurance and control if installation B. References C. Field Samples D. Mock-up E. Manufacturer’s Field Services and Reports 1.2 RELATED SCETIONS A. Section 01 32 19 – Submittals: Manufacturer’s Instructions and Certificates. B. Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship to produce work of specified quality. B. Follow manufacturer’s instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturer’s instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Conform to specified standards as a minimum quality for the work, except when more stringent tolerances, codes or specified requirements assign more rigid criteria or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. Inspect portions of work already performed under this Contract to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive succeeding work. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designated and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue or current on date for receiving bids. B. Obtain copies of standards when required by the Contract Documents. C. Where reference standards are followed, or otherwise accompanied, in the Specifications, by additional provisions, these are intended as modifications to the specified reference standards to strengthen or to add additional or more specific requirements to these standards. D. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or interference in any reference document. 1.5 FIELD SAMPLES A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual Specification Sections for review. B. Samples against which no exception is taken by the Architect represent a quality level for the Work.

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 40 00 – QUALITY CONTROL 01 40 00-2

C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, remove sample and restore area after field sample has been observed by Architect. 1.6 MOCK-UP A. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals and finishes. B. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, remove mock-up and restore area after mock-up has been observed by Architect. 1.7 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICE AND REPORTS A. When specified in individual Specification Sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to inspect site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment, as applicable, and to provide when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions and instructions given to applicators and installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers’ written instructions. C. Submit four copies of report within thirty (30) days of inspection to Architect for review.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 41 00 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-1

SECTION 01 41 00

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Quality Assurance. B. Schedule of regulatory requirements.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Document 00 72 13 - General Conditions: Permits and Codes 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Work performed under this contract shall be accomplished in accordance with, but not limited to, the applicable sections of the codes, laws, and regulations listed. The attention of the Contractor is specifically directed to Article 25 of the General Conditions. In executing the Contract, the Contractor stipulates that he is cognizant of the requirements of the several codes, laws, and regulations applicable to the work of this Project as set forth herein.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. 2017 Florida Building Code, with local amendments. B. National Fire Prevention Code. C. Life Safety Code D. Standard Plumbing Code with local amendments. E. Standard Mechanical Code. F. National Electrical Code with local amendments. G. Federal Register Document 49 FR 31528 - Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards, published August

7, 1984. H. Americans with Disabilities Act, 1990. I. Occupational Safety and Health Act of September, 2007, with amendments. J. Applicable State laws and codes.

K. Fire Sprinkler System Codes and Requirements.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 50 00 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROL 01 50 00-1

SECTION 01 50 00

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone services, water, and sanitary

facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Protection of the work, and water control, and dust control. C. Construction Facilities: Access roads, parking, progress cleaning, temporary buildings and field office,

and Project bulletin board. 1.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Owner will provide temporary power source(s). Location of power source(s) will be as directed by

building manager. B. Contractor shall not attempt to use any existing convenience outlets anywhere on the site without

direction from the building manager. 1.3 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE (OPTIONAL) 1.4 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE (BY OWNER) 1.5 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES (MANDATORY) A. Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary facilities for this Project. Location(s) as approved by

the Owner. 1.6 ACCESS ROADS A. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants. 1.7 PARKING A. Coordinate with the Owner for parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. B. When site space is not adequate for construction personnel, Contractor shall provide for additional off-

site parking. C. Do not use or block the Owner’s driveway and parking areas. 1.8 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Maintain areas cleaned of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. This Contractor shall provide and pay for disposal containers in this Contract. All discarded material shall be disposed of at an approved landfill. Burning is not allowed.

B. At the end of each

C. Contractor shall either remove debris from the project site daily or provide a dumpster on site in which to

deposit debris. Cost of removal shall be included in the Contractor’s lump sum proposal. 1.9 FIELD OFFICE AND MATERIAL STORAGE UNITS A. Contractors Field Office and material storage units, if used, shall be provided by the Contractor and

located as directed by the Owner.

END OF SECTION

work day, all debris shall be collected and deposited in the disposal containers furnished by the Contractor.

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 60 00 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00-1

SECTION 01 60 00

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufacturer's standard warranties and special warranties. B. General product requirements. C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. D. Product option requirements. E. Substitution limitations and procedures. F. Procedures for Owner-furnished products. G. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 260 - Guides for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims; Federal Trade Commission; current edition. B. CAN/CSA Z809 - National Standard for Sustainable Forest Management; CSA International Inc.; 2002 (R2007). C. GreenSeal GS-36 - Commercial Adhesives; Green Seal, Inc.; 2000. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. E. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit a separate form for each item upon which approval is requested, with the exception of groups of items (e.g., electrical fixtures, plumbing fixtures, etc.) for which an itemized listing may be attached. 3. Substitutions shall be subject to approval of Architect and Owner. Contractor's reliance on substituted materials in developing its pricing shall not be construed as to create a requirement for approval. C. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

http://www.aqmd.gov/�


D. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. E. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Architect before proceeding. E. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Architect shall be altered by the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Refer to Divisions 02 through 33. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures. Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. 1. Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems comprising the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, and erection of the Work. 2. Products may also include existing materials or components when specifically designated for reuse. B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. 2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber. C. Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that:


1. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project. 2. Have longer documented life span under normal use. 3. Result in less construction waste. 4. Are made of vegetable materials that are rapidly renewable. D. Sustainably Harvested Wood: 1. Definition: Wood-based materials include but are not limited to structural framing, dimension lumber, flooring, wood doors, finishes, and furnishings that are permanently installed in the project. Wood and wood-based products not permanently installed in the project are not included in the definition. 2. Specific Wood-Based Fabrications: Fabricate of sustainably harvested wood when so specified elsewhere. 3. Certification: Provide wood certified or labeled by an organization accredited by one of the following: a. The Forest Stewardship Council, The Principles for Natural Forest Management; for the United States visit http://www.fscus.org. 2.2 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 2.3 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming Products of More than One Manufacturer: Use one of the products named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. D. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. E. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Submit a request for substitution for other named manufacturers. Use of manufacturers not named not allowed. F. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements for substitutions G. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

http://www.fscus.org/�


2.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. Requests receive after that time will not be considered except as specified below under "Substitutions Requested After Award of Contract." B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer. C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the Contractor/Bidder: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to specified product. 2. Will provide identical warranty as required for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will pay for changes to building design, including architectural or engineering design, detailing, construction costs, or re-approval by authorities caused by the requested substitution. D. Substitutions after Award of Contract will not be considered when: 1. Indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without formal request submitted in accordance with this Section. 2. Submittal for substitution request has not been reviewed and recommended by Contractor. Substitution requests received directly from Subcontractors or Suppliers will be returned through the Contractor without review. 3. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents or other items of the Work. 4. Submittal for substitution request does not include point-by-point comparison of proposed substitution with specified product. E. Substitution Request Form: 1. Use Substitution Request Form for substitution requests during the bid phase. 2. Use "Substitution Request (After the Bidding Phase)" form bound at the end of this Section for substitution requests after the Award of Contract. 3. Requests related to Mechanical and/or Electrical Work may be submitted directly to each respective Consulting Engineer, with duplicate copies to the Architect and Owner. a. Action on request will be returned through the Architect. F. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: 1. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. 2. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. 3. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. 4. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. 5. Samples, where applicable or requested. 6. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. 7. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. 8. List of availability of maintenance services and replacement materials.


9. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. 10. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICCES. 11. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. 12. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 13. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. 14. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. G. Accepted Substitutions prior to Bid Date will be listed in Addenda published in accordance with Advertisement for Bids and the Instructions to Bidders. Bidders will not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. H. Architect's Action for Substitutions After Award of Contract: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. 1. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. 2. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 3.2 SUBSTITUTIONS REQUESTED AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT A. Substitutions will normally not be considered after date listed in Instructions to Bidders, except when required due to unforeseen circumstances. Within a period of 30 days after date of Contract, the Owner may, at its option, consider formal written requests for substitution of products in place of those specified when submitted in accord with the requirements stipulated herein. To receive consideration, one or more of the following conditions must be documented in any such request: 1. The substitution is required for compliance with final interpretation of Code requirements or insurance regulations. 2. The substitution is required due to unavailability of a specified product, through no fault of the Contractor. 3. The substitution is required because subsequent information disclosed the inability of the specified product to perform properly or to fit in the designated space. 4. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, performance, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 3.3 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. C. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. E. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.


F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. G. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. C. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. D. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. E. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. F. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. G. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. H. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. I. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. J. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. K. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. L. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. M. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 65 00 – PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS 01 65 00-1

SECTION 01 65 00

PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. This Section includes the general requirements for preparing for shipping, delivering, and handling materials and equipment. 2. Contractor shall make all arrangements for transporting, delivering, and handling of materials and equipment required for prosecution and completion of the Work. 3. When required, move stored materials and equipment without additional compensation and without changes to the Contract Times. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to individual Specification Sections for submittal requirements relative to delivering and handling materials and equipment. 1.3 PREPARING FOR SHIPMENT A. When practical, factory-assemble materials and equipment. Match mark or tag separate parts and assemblies to facilitate field assembly. Cover machined and unpainted parts that may be damaged by the elements with strippable, protective coating. B. Package materials and equipment to facilitate handling, and protect materials and equipment from damage during shipping, handling, and storage. Mark or tag outside of each package or crate to indicate the associated purchase order number, bill of lading number, contents by name, Owner’s contract name and number, Contractor name, equipment number, and approximate weight. Include complete packing lists and bills of materials with each shipment. C. Protect materials and equipment from exposure to the elements and keep thoroughly dry and dust- free at all times. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Lubricate bearings and other items requiring lubrication in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. D. Advance Notice of Shipments: 1. Keep Architect informed of delivery of all materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work. E. Do not ship materials and equipment until: 1. Related Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals have been approved or accepted (as applicable) by Architect, including, but not necessarily limited to, all Action Submittals associated with the materials and equipment being delivered. 2. Manufacturer’s instructions for handling, storing, and installing the associated materials and equipment have been submitted to and accepted by Architect in accordance with the Specifications. 3. Results of source quality control testing (factory testing), when required by the Contract Documents for the associated materials or equipment, have been reviewed and accepted by Architect. 4. Facilities required for handling materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions are in place and available. 5. Required storage facilities have been provided. 1.4 DELIVERY A. Scheduling and Timing of Deliveries: 1. Arrange deliveries of materials and equipment in accordance with the accepted Progress Schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. 2. Schedule deliveries to minimize space required for and duration of storage of materials and equipment at the Site or delivery location, as applicable. 3. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflicting with the Work and conditions at Site, and to accommodate the following:

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 65 00 – PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS 01 65 00-2

a. Work of subcontractors and Owner. b. Storage space limitations. c. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling materials and equipment. d. Owner’s use of premises. 4. Deliver materials and equipment to the Site during regular working hours. 5. Deliver materials and equipment to avoid delaying the Work and the Project, including work of other contractors, as applicable. Deliver anchor system materials, including anchor bolts to be embedded in concrete or masonry, in ample time to avoid delaying the Work. B. Deliveries: 1. Shipments shall be delivered with Contractor’s name, Subcontractor’s name (if applicable), Site name, Project name, and contract designation (example: “ABC Construction Co., City of Somewhere, Idaho, Wastewater Treatment Plant Primary Clarifier Improvements, Contract 25, General Construction”) clearly marked. 2. Site may be listed as the “ship to” or “delivery” address; but Owner shall not be listed as recipient of shipment unless otherwise directed in writing by Architect. 3. Provide Contractor’s telephone number to shipper; do not provide Owner’s telephone number. 4. Arrange for deliveries while CONTRACTOR’s personnel are at the Site. Contractor shall receive and coordinate shipments upon delivery. Shipments delivered to the Site when Contractor is not present will be refused by Owner and/or Architect, and Contractor shall be responsible for the associated delays and additional costs, if incurred. C. Containers and Marking: 1. Have materials and equipment delivered in manufacturer’s original, unopened, labeled containers. 2. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of materials and equipment to identify materials and equipment, to allow easy accumulation of parts, and to facilitate assembly. D. Inspection of Deliveries: 1. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipment to verify that: a. Materials and equipment comply with the Contract Documents and approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. b. Quantities are correct. c. Materials and equipment are undamaged. d. Containers and packages are intact and labels are legible. e. Materials and equipment are properly protected. 2. Promptly remove damaged materials and equipment from the Site and expedite delivery of new, undamaged materials and equipment, and remedy incomplete or lost materials and equipment to furnish materials and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents, to avoid delaying progress of the Work. 3. Advise Architect in writing when damaged, incomplete, or defective materials and equipment are delivered, and advise Architect of the associated impact on the Progress Schedule. 1.5 HANDLING OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle materials and equipment, including those furnished by Owner, by methods that prevent soiling or damaging materials and equipment and packaging. B. Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent scraping, marring, and otherwise damaging materials and equipment and surrounding surfaces. C. Handle materials and equipment by methods that prevent bending and overstressing. D. Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. E. Handle materials and equipment in safe manner and as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent damage. Do not drop, roll, or skid materials and equipment off delivery vehicles or at other times during handling. Hand-carry or use suitable handling equipment. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29-1

SECTION 01 73 29

CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work B. Section 01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements: Applicable code requirements, including mechanical and

electrical codes. C. Section 01 32 19 - Submittals. D. Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. E. Individual Project Specification Sections:

1. Cutting and patching incidental to Work of the Section. 2. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in Work of those Sections. 3. Limitations on cutting structural members.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:

1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor, where applicable. 6. Portions of building that are occupied.

B. Include in request:

1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed work, and products to be used. 5. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor, where applicable. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor, where applicable. 8. Date and time work will be executed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Primary products: Those required for original installation. B. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution under

provisions of Section 01 60 00. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect existing conditions before beginning work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

B. After uncovering existing work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work.

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29-2

C. Identify any dangerous concealed conditions exposed during the work to the Architect for decision and remedy.

D. Inform Architect immediately upon cutting of concealed piping, conduit, or other utilities. E. Correct defects before proceeding with the work of this Section.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary supports to maintain structural integrity of the work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage.

B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work. C. Maintain excavations free of water.

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching, including excavation and fill, to complete work. B. Fit products together to integrate with other work. C. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. D. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work. E. Remove samples of installed work for testing where specified or approved. F. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work.

3.4 PERFORMANCE

A. Execute work by other methods which will avoid damage to other work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

B. Where cutting and patching work installed under this contract, employ original installer to perform

cutting and patching; for existing construction, use personnel qualified in the applicable trade. C. Cut rigid materials using proper power saw or drill. D. Restore work with new products to meet requirements of Contract Documents. E. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. F. At penetrations of fire-rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with

fire-rated, fire resistant material to full thickness of penetrated element. G. Refinish surfaces to match adjoining finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or

natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 74 13 – PROGRESS CLEANING 01 74 13-1

SECTION 01 74 13

PROGRESS CLEANING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE A. Contractor shall provide all progress cleaning including for the Work of assigned sub-contractors. 1. During the progress of the Work, the Contractor shall store materials and equipment in an orderly manner and shall at all times keep the premises free from debris, litter, rubbish, and obstruction. 1.2 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. B. Floor cleaners shall comply with maximum allowable VOC content. C. Disposable paper products, supplies, and trash bags shall meet the minimum requirements of the US Environmental Protection Agency’s Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Provide progress cleaning. Do not conflict with related Project Sections. Resolve any conflicts that arise with Architect. B. Contractor shall keep the building and premises free from all surplus material, waste material, dirt and rubbish caused by his employees or work, and at the completion of his work shall remove all such surplus material, waste material, dirt and rubbish, as well as his tolls, equipment and scaffolding, and shall leave his work clean and spotless, unless more exact requirements are specified. In case of dispute, the Owner may remove all such items and charge the cost of such removal to the Contractor. C. Each sub-contractor shall perform his clean-up daily and shall transport his rubbish to an on-site location designated by the Contractor, who will arrange for its removal. D. At no time shall the Owner’s waste containers be used. Requests for dumpster usage and placement must be verified with the Owner. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner’s property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. E. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations F. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for progress cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 74 23 - FINAL CLEANING 01 74 23-1

SECTION 01 74 23

FINAL CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Final Cleaning of the Project. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Document 00 72 13 - General Conditions: Cleaning Up. B. Section 01 50 00 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Cleaning during construction. C. Section 01 77 00 - Contract Closeout Procedures.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. Execute interior work area and site cleaning. Provide access and coordinate with Owner's personnel.

B. Exterior project site areas shall be restored to the pre-project conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING

A. The Contractor and Architect shall walk and inspect building and site at the end of the project. The Architect will make a list of all areas not sufficiently clean. The Contractor will then re-clean, remove all debris so identified and restore the site to its original condition. Any damage to the buildings or site areas (including paving, sidewalks and landscape materials) shall be restored or replaced to its original condition by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 77 00 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-1

SECTION 01 77 00

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Administrative provisions for Substantial Completion and for final acceptance. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Document 00 72 13 - General Conditions: Fiscal provisions and additional administrative requirements. B. Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work C. Section 01 74 23 - Final Cleaning D. Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. When work or assigned portion of work is substantially complete, submit written notice to the Architect with list of items to be completed or corrected.

B. Should Architect find work is not substantially complete, he will notify Contractor in writing of observed

deficiencies. C. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written Notice of Substantial Completion. D. When Architect, or his designated representative, concurs that work is substantially complete for a phase

of the work, he will document Substantial Completion under provisions of General Conditions.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. When work is complete, submit written certification of the following: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and deficiencies listed with

Phased Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced, and are fully operational. 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection.

B. Until the final inspection has been made, and all required Closeout Documents and materials have been

received, the Owner will not advance any of the retainage or make the final payment to the Contractor. 1. Upon receipt of the Contractor's Notification of the date when the work has been completed, the

Owner and Architect will conduct a final inspection within seven (7) calendar days. 2. The final inspection will be conducted by an Owner’s representative, the Architect, the Engineers,

where necessary; Contractor's representative, and representatives of major subcontractors where applicable, are required to attend.

3. The inspection will determine if the work has been completed in conformance to the intent of the Contract Documents, whether there are any minor items of such incomplete or unsatisfactory (or seasonal work such as planting remaining), what items are to be included in the final punch list, or if there are major deficiencies which must be corrected by the Contractor before another final inspection can be made in preparation for Contract Settlement.

C. Should Architect find work incomplete, he will notify Contractor in writing of observed deficiencies. D. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of final completion.

E. When Architect finds out work is complete, he will consider closeout submittals.

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 77 00 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-2

1.5 RE-INSPECTION FEES

A. Should work require re-inspection by the Architect due to failure of work to coincide with the Contractor's request for completion inspection, the Owner will deduct Architect's compensation for re-inspection from the final payment to Contractor.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Submit one notarized original and two copies of the Contractor's release and certification which indicates: 1. The work was completed in conformance to the construction documents, including change

orders, except any minor items identified in the Owner's or its Architect's proposed Certificate of Completion;

2. The total amount due the Contractor and a separately stated amount for each unsettled claim against the Owner;

3. The Owner is released from all claims, other than those stated in the Contractor's release; and 4. Wages paid to laborers or mechanics were consistent with the wage rate requirements of the

Contract and there are no outstanding claims for unpaid wages. B. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities:

1. Certificate of Occupancy, where applicable. 2. Certificate of Inspection required for Mechanical and Electrical Systems.

C. Project Record Documents, under provision of Section 01 78 39. D. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: Conform to the Conditions of the Contract. E. Consent of Surety to Final Payment. F. Certificates of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations: Conform to Supplementary Conditions. G. Copies of all approved, returned submittals with all warranty information.

H. Failure to comply with the requirements of this Section, or those of Sections 01 74 23 and 01 78 39,

where applicable, may significantly delay Contract Closeout and final payment.

1.7 STATEMENT OF ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS

A. Submit final statement reflecting adjustments to Contract Sum indicating: 1. Original Contract Sum 2. Previous Change Orders 3. Deductions for un-corrected work 4. Deductions for liquidated damages 5. Deductions for re-inspection fees 6. Other adjustments to Contract Sum 7. Total Contract Sum as adjusted 8. Previous payments 9. Sum remaining due

B. Architect will issue a Final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum not previously

made by change orders.

1.8 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT

A. Submit final Periodical Estimate for Partial Payment marked "FINAL", identifying total adjusted Contract Price, previous payments, and balance due.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1

SECTION 01 78 39

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: 1. Throughout progress of the Work of this Contract, maintain an accurate record of all changes in the Contract Documents, as described in Article 3.1 below. 2. Upon completion of the Work of this Contract, transfer the recorded changes to a set of Record Documents, as described in Article 3.2 below. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Submittals: Section 01 32 19 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on the Contractor's staff as approved in advance by the Architect. B. Accuracy of Records: Thoroughly coordinate all changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and other Documents where such entry is required to properly show the change. Accuracy of records shall be such that future searches for items shown in the Contract Documents may reasonably rely on information obtained from the approved Record Documents. C. Timing of Entries: Make all entries within 24 hours after receipt of information. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: The Architect's approval of the current status of Record Documents will be a prerequisite to his approval of requests for progress payment and request for final payment under the Contract. B. Progress Submittals: Prior to submitting each request for progress payment, secure the Architect’s approval of the Record Documents as currently maintained. C. Final Submittal: Prior to submitting request for final payment, submit the final Record Documents to the Architect and secure his approval. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Use all means necessary to maintain the job set of Record Documents completely protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the Work and transfer of the recorded data to the final Record Documents. In the event of loss of recorded data, use all means necessary to secure the data to the Architect's approval; such means shall include, if necessary in the opinion of the Architect, removal and replacement of concealing materials and, in such case, all replacements shall be to the standards originally specified in the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Job Set: Promptly following award of Contract, secure from the Architect, at no charge to the Contractor, one complete set of all documents comprising the Construction Contract. B. Architect will provide one complete set of Drawings as required in Article 3.2.B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MAINTENANCE OF JOB SET A. Identification: Immediately upon receipt of the job set described in Paragraph 2.1A above, identify each of the documents with the title "RECORD DOCUMENTS - JOB SET".


B. Preservation: 1. Considering the Contract completion time, the probable number of occasions upon which the job set must be taken out for new entries and for examination, and the conditions under which these activities will be performed, devise a suitable method for protecting the job set to the approval of the Architect. 2. Do not use the job set for any purpose except entry of new data and for review by the Architect, until start of transfer of data to final Record Documents. 3. Maintain the job set at the site of Work as that site is designated by the Architect. C. Making Entries on Drawings: Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the change by note and by graphic line, as required. Date all entries. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" around the area or areas affected. In the event of overlapping changes, different colors may be used for each of the changes. D. Making Entries on Other Documents: 1. Where changes are caused by directives issued by the Architect, clearly indicate the change by note in ink, colored pencil, or rubber stamp. 2. Where changes are caused by Contractor-originated proposals approved by the Architect, including inadvertent errors by the Contractor which have been accepted by the Architect, clearly indicate the change by note in erasable colored pencil. 3. Make entries in the pertinent documents as approved by the Architect. E. Conversion of Schematic Layouts: 1. In most cases on the drawings, arrangement of conduits and circuits, piping, ducts, and other similar items, is shown schematically and is not intended to portray precise physical layout. Final physical arrangement is as determined by the Contractor, subject the Architect's approval. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate information as to the final physical arrangement of items which are shown only schematically on the drawings. 2. Show on the job set of Record Drawings, by dimension accurate to within 1", the center line of each run of items such as are described in Paragraph E.1 above. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as "cast iron drain", "galv. water", etc. Show by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item ("under slab", "in ceiling plenum", "exposed", etc.). Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the specifications. 3. The Architect may waive the requirements for conversion of schematic data where, in the Architect's judgment, such conversion serves no beneficial purpose. However, do not rely upon waivers being issued except as specifically issued in writing by the Architect. 4. Timing of Entries: Be alert to changes in the work from how it is shown in the Contract Documents. Promptly, and in no case later than 24 hours after the change has occurred and been made known to the Contractor, make the entry or entries required. 5. Accuracy of entries: Use all means necessary, including the proper tools for measurement, to determine actual locations of the installed items. 3.2 FINAL RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: The purpose of the final Record Documents is to provide factual information regarding all aspects of the work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of design to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination. B. Approval of Recorded Data Prior to Transfer: Following receipt of the sepia transparencies described in Paragraph 2.1B above, and prior to start of transfer of recorded data thereto, secure a review by the Architect of all recorded data. Make all required revisions. C. Transfer of Data to Drawings: Carefully transfer all change data shown on the job set of Record Drawings to the corresponding transparencies, coordinating the changes as required, and clearly indicating at each affected detail and other drawing the full description of all changes made during construction and the actual location of items described in Paragraph E.3 above. Call attention to each entry by drawing a "cloud" around the area or areas affected. Make all change entries on the transparencies neatly, consistently, and in ink or crisp black pencil. D. Transfer of Data to Other Documents: If the Documents other than Drawings have been kept clean successfully during progress of the Work, and if entries have been sufficiently orderly thereon to the approval of the Architect, the job set of those documents (other than drawings) will be accepted by the Architect as final Record Documents for those Documents. If any such Document is not so approved by the Architect, secure a new copy of that document from the Architect at the Architect's usual charge for reproduction; carefully transfer the charge data to the new copy and to the approval of the Architect.


E. Review and Approval: Submit the completed total set of Record Documents to the Architect as described in Paragraph 1.3C above. Participate in review meeting or meetings as required by the Architect, make all required changes in the Record Documents to the Architect.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 01 79 00 – DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00-1

SECTION 01 79 00

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner’s personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems and equipment 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems and equipment B. Related Sections: 1. Each Division for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program of demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time and instructor’s names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. Indicate proposed training modules utilizing manufacturer produced demonstration and training DVD for systems, equipment and products in lieu of live instruction module B. Qualification Data: For instructor C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance based tests. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within 7 days of end of each training module. 1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information: a. Name of Project b. Name and address of videographer c. Name of Architect d. Name of Contractor and Sub-Contractor e. Date of recording 2. Transcript: Prepared on 8 ½ x 11 inch paper, punched and bound in heavy duty, 3 ring, vinyl covered binders. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding DVD. Include name of Project and date of recording on each page. 3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner’s use. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 1 Section “Quality Control”, experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.


C. Pre-instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination”. Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructor personnel, audiovisual equipment and facilities needed to avoid delays 3. Review required content of instruction 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner’s operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner’s operations. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data have been reviewed and approved by the Architect. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that each participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment or component as required by the Contract Documents: 1. Operational and Maintenance Requirements and Criteria a. Calibration Strategy for Outdoor Exhaust Dampers b. Carbon Dioxide Monitoring Protocol c. Carbon Monoxide Monitoring Protocol d. Chemical Management and Minimization Policy e. Energy Metering Report Plan f. Operation Schedule for EPA Water Sense/Smart Water Applications, Smart Controllers and Rain Shut off Devices g. Integrated Pest Management Plan h. Site Maintenance Contracts i. Waste Minimization Plan j. Water Efficiency and Verification Plan k. Schedule for HVAC and Filter Maintenance l. General Sustainable Housekeeping 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals b. Operations manuals c. Maintenance manuals d. Project record documents e. Identification systems f. Warranties and bonds g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meanings of warnings, trouble indications and error messages b. Instructions on stopping c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems f. Special operating instructions and procedures 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures b. Equipment or system break-in procedures


c. Routine and normal operating instructions d. Regulation and control procedures e. Control sequences f. Safety procedures g. Instructions on stopping h. Normal shutdown instructions i. Operating procedures for emergencies j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem or equipment failure k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems m. Special operating instructions and procedures 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments b. Checking adjustments c. Noise and vibration adjustments d. Economy and efficiency adjustments 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions b. Test and inspection procedures 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance f. Procedures for routine maintenance g. Instructions on use of special tools 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions b. Repair instructions c. Disassembly; component removal, repair and replacement; reassembly instructions d. Instructions for identifying parts and components e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Division 1 Section “Operations and Maintenance Data”. B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner’s personnel to adjust, operate and maintain systems, subsystems and equipment not part of a system. 1. Owner will furnish instructor to describe Owner’s operational philosophy 2. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner at least seven days in advance D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing prior to training use.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 02 41 19 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19-1

SECTION 02 41 19

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of designated interior walls, doors and frames, ceilings, flooring, ceramic tile, millwork, plumbing, electrical, lighting, HVAC units and miscellaneous equipment and furnishings. 2. Patching and repairs. 3. Relocation of existing fire sprinkler heads and piping as required for work of this Project. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Owner’s property. B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner’s property. Remove, clean and protect against damage. Deliver items as directed by Owner. C. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. All site landscaping damaged during the construction phase shall be restored by the Contractor at the close out of the job. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner’s property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor’s property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor’s option. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated. B. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. C. Record drawings at Project Closeout according to Division 1 Section “Project Closeout” 1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Coordinate with the Owner’s asbestos abatement contractor for any construction material that contains asbestos. Notify Owner immediately if asbestos materials are encountered. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy a portion of the building adjacent to selective demolition area. Required exit ways from the Owner-occupied areas shall be maintained during the renovation and construction of this project. Conduct selective demolition so that Owner’s operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner’s operations B. Storage or sale or removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equal or surpasses that of existing materials. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. B. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements that conflict with the intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Architect. C. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. a. Provide not less than 72 hours’ notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover.

B. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect and seal or cap off indicated utility services serving building to be selectively renovated. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, provide bypass connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding with selective disconnection. C. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. 1. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors and other existing finish work that are to remain and are exposed during selective demolition operations. 3.3 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Clean adjacent surfaces and improvements of dust, dirt and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition. C. Provide dust control for the affected portion of the Buildings included in this project. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction as indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes, plumb, square and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. 2. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame- cutting operations.


3. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited. 4. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of selective demolition operations. B. Break up and remove concrete slabs on grade, unless otherwise shown to remain. 3.5 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective demolition operations. B. Patching is specified in Division 1 Section “Cutting and Patching” C. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow materials to accumulate on site. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner’s property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Sweep the building, covered walkways, sidewalks and paved areas broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 03 00 00 – CONCRETE, GENERAL 03 00 00-1

SECTION 03 00 00

CONCRETE, GENERAL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. All poured-in-place concrete work shown on the drawings is governed by this section. Concrete strength not otherwise designated shall be 3,000 psi, as determined by the use of ASTM C 31 and C39. All precast concrete shall be 3,500 psi. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specification sand standards, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where provisions of these codes and standards are in conflict with the building code in force for this project, the building code shall govern. 1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 2. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". 3. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". 4. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection". 5. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". 6. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) “Manual of Standard Practice” B. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Should cylinders and cores indicate unacceptable concrete, load testing or removal and replacement of the concrete may be required at no cost to the Owner. C. Concrete Testing Service: 1. The Contractor shall employ, at his own expense, a testing laboratory experienced in the design and testing of concrete materials and mixes to perform material evaluation tests, to design concrete mixes, and to perform strength tests associated with form removal. Testing agency shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329. 2. The Contractor shall employ at his own expense, an independent testing laboratory to perform the testing of the concrete during the process of the work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times. Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the Owner’s expense, including the retesting of rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at Contractor’s expense. The independent testing agency shall be qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329. D. Welding of reinforcing steel shall be limited to welders whose competence has been treated according to standards of Structural Welding Code of American Welding Society. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitous Materials: Portland Cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: fly ash, other pozzolans, ground granulated blast furnace slag and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings – Concrete Reinforcement: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI Manual 315 “Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures” showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars and arrangement of reinforcement. Show location of construction joints planned. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, specifications with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures, bonding agents, joint systems,


curing compounds, waterstops, chemical floor hardeners, and others as requested by the Architect/Engineer. C. Test reports specified in Paragraphs PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES, FIELD QUALITY CONTROL, and EVALUATION OF QUALITY CONTROL TESTS. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, construct formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced or other acceptable panel-type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly-placed concrete with bow or deflection. B. Use overlaid plywood complying with U. S. Product Standards PS-1 “A-C or B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form”, Class I. C. Use plywood complying with U. S. Product Standard PS-1 “B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood:, Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill-oiled and edge sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark. D. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber on at least 2- edges and one side for tight fit. E. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces to be cured with water or curing compound. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bar: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, welded steel wire fabric, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. C. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spaces, and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI “ Manual of Standard Practice”, unless otherwise indicated. Wood, brick, and other devices will not be acceptable. D. Slabs On Grade: Use supports or horizontal runners where wetted base material will not support chair legs. E. Exposed-To-View Concrete Surfaces: Where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are hot-dip galvanized or plastic protected or stainless steel protected. F. Fabricate steel reinforcing in accordance with CRSI’s “Manual Standard Practice”. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitous Material: Use the following Cementitous materials of the same brand and source throughout the project. 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, as follows: a. Provide Type I cement, except as otherwise indicated. b. Provide Type III cement for High-Early Strength concrete where shown or scheduled. c. Use one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise accepted by the Architect/Engineer. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F. 3. Ground, Granulated Blast Furnace/Slag: ASTM C989, Grade 100 or 120.


a. All concrete other than foundation concrete shall be a blend of Portland Cement and a minimum of 40% blast-furnace slag. B. Aggregates: 1. General: Maximum aggregate size shall not be larger than one-fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars. Provide aggregates from one source of supply to ensure uniformity in color, size and shape. 2. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33, and as herein specified. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C33 but which have shown by special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. a. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps, or other deleterious substances. b. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam, or foreign matter, as follows (maximum aggregate size 1 ½”): 1) Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2) Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank run gravel is not permitted. 3) Pea Gravel Aggregate: Conform to ASTM C404, Size No. 8. 4) Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C330. C. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable. D. Admixtures: Provide admixtures produced by established reputable manufacturers and use in compliance with the manufacturer’s printed directions. Do not use admixtures which have not been incorporated and tested in accepted mixes, unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Architect/Engineer. 1. Air-Entraining Mixture: ASTM C260. 2. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A and containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions. 3. Set-Control Admixture: ASTM C494, as follows: a. Type D, Water-reducing and Retarding with not more than 0.1% chloride ions. b. Type E, Water-reducing and Accelerating with not more than 0.1% chloride ions. 4. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F 5. Calcium Chloride: Do not use calcium chloride in concrete. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Fiber type conforming to ASTM D1751 or cork type conforming to ASTM D1752, Type II. B. Joint Sealant Compound: 1. Horizontal surfaces (maximum 3% slope): a. Inside buildings - ASTM D1190 or ASTM D1850; outside building – ASTM D1190. 2. Vertical Surfaces (greater than 3% slope) - ASTM C290 C. Chemical Hardener: Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium fluosilicate and zinc fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent, containing not less than 2 lbs. of fluosilicates per gallon. D. Curing Material 1. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per square yard, complying with AASHTO M182, Class 3. 2. Moisture Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C171. a. Waterproof paper b. Polyethylene film c. Polyethylene-coated burlap 3. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type I. E. Vapor Barrier: ASTM D4387 polyethylene sheeting, minimum 6 mil thickness. F. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C881, two component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material “Type”, “Grade”, and “Class” to suit project requirements. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:


“Epoxtite”, A.C. Horn “Edoco 2118 Epoxy Adhesive”, Edoco Technical Products “Sikadur 35, Hi-Med, LV”, Sika Chemical Corp. “Euco Epoxy 463 or 615”, Euclid Chemical Co. “Patch and Bond Epoxy”, The Burke Co. “Sure-Poxy”, Kaufman Products, Inc.

2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES

A. General: 1. All concrete shall contain a minimum of five sacks of cement per cubic yard. Tremie concrete,

where required; use minimum of 7 sacks of cement per cubic yard. 2. All concrete not specifically designated shall be proportioned for a strength of 3,000 lbs. per

square inch at 28 days of age. B. Slump Limits: (slump in inches)

Type of Construction Maximum Minimum Reinforced foundation walls and footings

5

2

Slabs and Beams

5

3

Reinforced columns and pilasters

5

3

Masonry grout

10

8

C. Proportion design mixes for each type and strength by either laboratory trial batch or field experience

methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete as required, complying with ACI 211.1 for normal weight concrete and ACI 211.2 for structural lightweight concrete. 1. Field Experience Method: When field experience method is used to select concrete

proportions, establish procedures as specified in ACI 301 and ACI 318. When proportioning by field experience method furnish mix design and independent testing facility proof of standard deviation using materials, mix and production facility proposed.

2. Laboratory Trial Method: When laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 192 and conduct strength test in accordance with ASTM C 39, as specified in ACI 301. a. When proportioning by trial batch method, furnish compressive strength developed at

7-days and 28-days, from not less than two test cylinders cast for each 7-day and 28-day test, and for each design mix.

b. Establish a curve showing relationship between water-cement ratio (or cement content) and compressive strength, with at least three points representing batches which produce strengths above and below that required. Use not less than two specimens tested at 28-dyas, or an earlier age when acceptable to the Architect/Engineer, to establish each point on the curve.

D. Submit Testing Service report to the Architect/Engineer of each proposed mix for each type of

concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mix data has been reviewed by Architect/Engineer.

E. Admixtures:

1. Use air-entraining admixture in all concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at the manufacturer’s prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having 4-½% entrained air with tolerance in either direction from this optimum of 1-½%.

2. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control.

3. Contractor may use fly ash as part of the cement content of the concrete; fly ash shall be a maximum of 25% of the cement content (cement and fly ash). All other concrete shall have a cement content of a blend of Portland Cement and a maximum of 50% of the cement content of blast-furnace slag.

F. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the Contractor when

characteristics of material, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant; at no


additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect/Engineer. Laboratory test data for revised mix designs and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the Architect/Engineer before using in the work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMS

A. Design of formwork for structural stability and sufficiency is the Contractor’s responsibility. Conform to ACI 301, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

B. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position.

C. Construct forms complying with ACI 347, to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown, and to obtain

accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages, and inserts, and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide back-up joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.

D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces. Provide

crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, and recesses to prevent swelling and for easy removal.

E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for clean out, for

inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations.

F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges ¾”, unless otherwise noted, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber

chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable length, removable or snap-off metal form ties, designed to

prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. 1. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at

least 1-½” inside concrete. 2. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes larger than 1” diameter

in concrete surface. H. Provisions For Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other

trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately support items built into forms.

I. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove

chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks.

3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT: A. Comply with specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute’s “Manual of Standard Practice” for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice and other materials that reduce or destroy the bond. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers as required.


D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2” beyond the last leg of continuous bar support. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

F. Splices: Provide standard reinforcing splices by lapping ends per ACI 318. Splice reinforcing bars, 40

bar diameters, unless otherwise noted. 3.3 JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints which are not shown on the drawings so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

B. Provide keyways at least 1-½” deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs, and between walls and

footings; accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. C. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise shown or noted otherwise.

D. Control Joints in Slabs on Ground: Construct control joints in slabs on ground to form patterns as shown. Use inserts ¼” wide by 1/5 to ¼ of the slab depth, unless otherwise shown. Form control joints by inserting a pre-molded hardboard or fiberboard strip into the fresh concrete until the top surface of the strip is flush with the slab surface. After the concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove and loose debris. Fill with joint sealant material continuous. Sawn joints are not permitted.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by the suppliers of the items attached.

B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed strips by the use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting type screeds.

3.5 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES

A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before reinforcement is place. B. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions

of the form-coating compound manufacturer’s directions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting.

Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.6 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mix Concrete: All concrete shall be ready-mix concrete. Comply with the requirements of ASTM C94, and herein specified.

1. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to the rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C94 may be required. When the air temperature is between 85° F and 90° F, reduce the mixing and delivery time form 1-½ hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90° F, reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

2. No additional water shall be added to concrete without the approval of the Architect/Engineer. Should additional water be required to obtain a slump as specified


in this section for the type of concrete, the Contractor shall perform slump tests in accordance with ASTM C143 to determine the actual slump of the concrete in the mixer. The Contractor may then add water, but in no case shall the additional water exceed the maximum slump specified for the type concrete. Slump tests and the addition of water to the mixer shall be completed within 15 minutes of the arrival of the mixer at the site. Additional water shall not be added to the mix after the mixer has been on site longer than 15 minutes.

3. A delivery ticket showing truck number, date, and time mixing was started shall be given to the Contractor’s superintendent at the job site before placing the concrete from the truck mixer. At the job site, the Contractor’s superintendent shall note on the delivery ticket the time of the completion of the concrete placement from the truck and the general area of the structure in which the concrete was placed. A complete file of all delivery tickets shall be maintained and kept available at the job site until the completion of the project.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. General: Comply with ACI 304 and as herein specified. B. Pre-placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation,

reinforcing steel and items to be embedded or cast-in. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coatings are not used. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.

C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on

concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operation.

D. Placing concrete in forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24” and in a

manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.

E. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading,

rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with the recommended practices of ACI 309, to suit the type of concrete and project conditions. 1. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate the placed layer of concrete and at least 6” into the preceding layer. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix.

F. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation within the

limits of the construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. G. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strikeoff. Use bull floats or darbies to

smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

H. Do not place concrete in an inundated excavation. I. Cold Weather Placing:

1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40° F, uniformly heat all water and aggregates before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of 50° F and not more than 80°F at point of placement.

2. Use water-reducing retarding admixture (Type D) when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions.

J. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:


1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90°F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to lower temperature provided water equivalent of ice is to total amount of mixing water. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcing and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep sub-grade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots or dry areas. K. Concrete flat work shall be installed with a slope of less than 2%.

3.8 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed-to-view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding ¼” in height rubbed down or chipped off.

B. Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view, or that are to be covered with a

coating material applied directly to concrete. This is as cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed.

C. Related Uniformed Surfaces: At tops of beams, horizontal offsets surfaces occurring adjacent to

formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab and topping surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified. 1. After screening, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for

floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidated surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding ¼" in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

B. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view, and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thin film finish coating system.. 1. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final

troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free from trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8” in 10’ when tested with a 10’ straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system.

C. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin set mortar, apply trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming. D. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to all exterior concrete slabs, platforms, steps and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Immediately after trowel finish, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

E. Chemical Hardener Finish: Apply chemical hardener finish to interior concrete floors exposed to view and where indicated. Apply liquid chemical hardener after complete curing and drying of the concrete surface. Dilute liquid hardener with water, and apply in 3 coats; first coat, 1/3 strength. Evenly apply each coat and allow 24 hours for drying between coats. 1. Apply proprietary chemical hardeners in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instruction. 2. After final coat of chemical hardener solution is applied and dried, remove surplus hardener by scrubbing and mopping with water.


3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place, unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place and cure concrete as specified to blend with in place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide pre-engineered building column bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for building columns at correct elevations, complying with diagrams and templates from manufacturer furnishing pre-engineered metal buildings. 3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection and ACI 301 for jhot weather protection during curing. 1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing

and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7-days. 2. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has

dried. Continue final curing for at least 7-days in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period.

B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, by

curing compound, and by any combination thereof, as herein specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by the following methods:

a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. b. Continuous water fog spray. c. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover

with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4” lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in

widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3” and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Provide curing compound to slabs as follows: a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final

finishing operations are complete (within 2-hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions. Recoat most areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3-hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

b. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect.

C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported

slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above as applicable.

D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat

surfaces by application of appropriate curing compound unless otherwise noted. 1. Final cure compound surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of

moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed.

3.12 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50° F (10° C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.


3.13 REUSE OF FORMS

A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.

B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins

and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use “patched” forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to the Architect.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Architect. 1. Cut out honeycomb, rock-pockets, voids over ¼” in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods

and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1”. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound has dried.

2. For exposed to view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot

be repaired to satisfaction of Architect/Engineer. Surface defects, as such, include cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock-pockets, fins and other projections on surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

C. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the durability of the

concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete. D. Repair of Finished Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for

smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope.

E. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which affect the durability of the concrete.

Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01” wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock-pockets, and other objectionable conditions.

F. Correct high area in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days. G. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas and replace with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect.

H. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1” in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least ¾” clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

I. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1” in diameter by dry-pack method. Groove

top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-pack consisting of one part portland cement to 2-½ parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.

J. Use epoxy based mortar for structural repairs where directed by Engineer.


K. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance by the Engineer.

3.15 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean and install joint filler according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. C. Install semi-rigid joint filler full depth in saw cut joints and at least 2” deep in formed joint. Overfill joint and trim filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.16 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. The Contractor shall employ a testing approved by the Architect/Engineer to perform other tests and to submit test reports. Sampling and testing for field quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by the Architect.

B. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94

1. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test of each concrete load at point of discharge; and one for each set of comprehensive strength test specimens.

2. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40° F (4° C) and below, and when 80° F (27° C) and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made.

3. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of 3 standard cylinders for each compressive strength. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required.

4. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day; 1 specimen tested at 7 days; 2 specimens tested at 28 days. a. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory-cured

cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

b. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

C. Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect/Engineer and Contractor on the same day that

tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results

indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure as directed by Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable concrete is verified.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 04 20 00 – UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00-1

SECTION 04 20 00

UNIT MASONRY PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete unit masonry 2. Brick masonry B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Steel lintels in unit masonry are specified in Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications”. 2. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry are specified in Division 8 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (f’m) at 28 days. B. For Concrete Unit Masonry: As follows, based on net area: 1. f'm = 1900 psi C. For brick unit masonry: As follows on gross area: 1. f’m = 2000 psi 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications. B. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency, employed and paid by Contractor or manufacturer, indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following proposed masonry materials with requirements indicated: 1. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270 2. Grout mixes 3. Masonry units 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must demonstrate to Architect’s satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM C 1093, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the work. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not place until units are in an air-dried condition.


B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry. C. Hot Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100° F. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each type of concrete masonry unit required. B. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. C. Provide square-edged units for exterior corners and bullnose edges on exposed interior corners. D. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength indicated below; E. Do not use chipped or broken units. F. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit masonry construction of the strength indicated. 1. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 2. Aggregates: Do not use aggregates made from pumice, scoria or tuff. 3. Provide Type II, non-moisture-controlled units. 4. Size: Manufactured to the actual dimensions listed below (within tolerances specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification) for the corresponding nominal sizes indicated on the Drawings: a. 4“ nominal: 3-5/8” actual b. 6” nominal: 5-5/8” actual c. 8” nominal: 7-5/8” actual d. 12” nominal: 11-5/8” actual G. Exposed Faces: Smooth uniform texture and free from chips and broken edges. H. Provide ¾” clearance at all structural steel components by laying or cutting of units. I. Provide 2 hour fire rated concrete masonry units as required.


2.2 BRICK MASONRY A. General: Provide shapes indicated for each form of brick masonry required. B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216: 1. Initial Rate of Absorption: Between 5 and 20 g/30 sq in per minute when tested per ASTM C67 2. Surface Coloring: Brick with surface coloring shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C67 with no observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet. Face brick and texture shall match the existing face brick. 3. Type: FBS 4. Size: Brick manufactured to the following actual dimensions within tolerances specified in ASTM C216 a. Size of existing units: 3 5/8” wide by 2 ¼” high by 7 5/8” long. Brick shall match existing building (FIELD VERIFY). 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. C. Mortar Cement: UBC Standard No. 21-14 D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. E. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144 G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404 H. Water: Clean and potable. 2.4 REINFORCING STEEL A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows: 1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615 2. Grade 60 B. Deformed Reinforcing Wire: ASTM A 496, with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 zinc coating. 2.5 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following: B. Galvanized carbon steel wire, coating class as follows: C. ASTM A 153, Class B-2 for both interior and exterior walls. D. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 9 gage 2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 9 gage E. For single & double wythe masonry, provide type with deformed side rods and smooth cross rods and a unit width of 1½" to 2" less than the wall thickness. 1. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16” o.c. Diagonal design with cross rods is not approved.


2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire: As follows: 1. Galvanized Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating. 2. Wire Diameter: 0.1875” C. Steel Sheet: As follows: 1. Thickness of Steel Sheet Galvanized After Fabrication: Uncoated thickness of steel sheet for hot-dip galvanizing after fabrication. 2. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class B-1, B-2 or B-3, as applicable to size and form indicated. 2.7 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STRUCTURAL FRAME A. General: Two-piece assemblies as described below allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between wall and framework parallel to plane of wall, but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it. 1. Wire Diameter: 0.1875”. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron inserts of type and size indicated. B. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers; of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations: 1. Headed bolts 2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Vinyl Sheet Flashing: Flexible sheet flashing especially formulated from virgin polyvinyl chloride with plasticizers and other modifiers to remain flexible and waterproof in concealed masonry applications, black in color, and of thickness indicated below: 1. Thickness: 30 mils 2. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. B. Adhesive for Flashings: Of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material for use indicated. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Vinyl Sheet Flashing: a. Lexusco Water Barrier, International Permalite, Inc. b. Nervastral, Nervastral, Inc. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). B. Plastic Weep Hole/Vent: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, weep hole/ventilators that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cell Vent, Dur-O-Wall, Inc. 2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of ½ cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and ½ cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gallon of water. 2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXERS


A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, proportion specification for types of mortar indicated below: 1. Type S D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of consistency indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement that will completely fill spaces intended to receive grout. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by the Installer, listing conditions detrimental to the performance of unit masonry. C. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of thickness indicated. B. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in this and other sections of the Specifications. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arises, do not exceed ¼” in 10’, nor 3/8” in 20’, nor ½” in 40’ or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed ¼” in 20’, nor ½” in 40’ or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus ¼” in 10’, nor ½” maximum. B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed ¼” in 20’, nor ½” in 40’ or more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8” in 10’, nor 1/16” within width of a single unit. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed ½” in 20’, nor ¾” in 40’ or more. D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus ¼” nor plus ½”. E. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8”, with a maximum thickness limited to ½”. Do not vary bed- joint thickness from bed-joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 “. Do not vary from head-joint thickness


by more than plus or minus 1/8”. Do not vary from head-joint thickness from adjacent head-joint thickness by more than 1/8”. Do not vary from collar- joint thickness indicated by more than minus ¼” or plus 3/8”. Brick mortar joints shall match the thickness of the existing brick mortar joints. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less- than-half size units at corners, jambs, and where possible, at other locations. B. Lay walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4 “ horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2”. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4” horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. E. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back half-unit length for one-half running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly (if required), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. F. Built-In Work: As construction progresses, build-in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. G. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. Conduit and pipes shall not run horizontally through masonry. H. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. I. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24” under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. B. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 3/8” joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls that are to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MASONRY A. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course, at corners, unless otherwise shown. B. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated “L” units in addition to masonry bonding. C. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and space as follows:


1. Provide individual metal ties not more than 16” o.c. 2. Provide continuity with horizontal-joint reinforcement by using pre-fabricated “T”- units. 3.7 CAVITIES A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavities/air spaces flush. B. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity. C. Tie exterior wythe to back-up with individual metal ties. Stagger alternate courses. 3.8 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8” in exterior side of walls, ½” elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6”. B. Space reinforcement not more than 16” o.c. C. Provide reinforcement in mortar joint 1 block course above and below wall openings and extending 24” beyond opening. D. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. E. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated “L” and “T” sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1” in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but nor more than 24” o.c. vertically and 36” o.c. horizontally. 3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build in related items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Fit bond breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of block units on one side of control joint. Fill the resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces. C. Build-in horizontal pressure relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible air filler of width required for installing a sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”. 3.11 LINTELS A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 24” for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. B. Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color, texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcement bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by same method as CMU.


C. Provide galvanized steel lintel angles at brick openings. D. Provide minimum bearing of 8” at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.12 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as required to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. B. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar, grout, or concrete. Brace, tie and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. C. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. D. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained a sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. E. Do not exceed the following pour heights for grout: 1. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 1-1/2” or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 3”, pour height of 12”. 2. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2” or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3”, pour height of 60”. 3. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2” or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3”, pour height of 12 feet. 4. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3” or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 4”, pour height of 24 feet. F. Provide cleanout holes at least 3” in least dimension for grout pours over 60” in height. G. Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar. 3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints including corner, openings, and adjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry. E. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. F. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave half panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect’s approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. G. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contract with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. H. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. I. Clean brick by means of bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA “Technical Note No. 20 Revised” using the following masonry cleaner: 1. Job mixed detergent solution.


J. Clean concrete masonry by means of cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. K. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 04 72 00 – CAST STONE MASONRY 04 72 00-1

SECTION 04 72 00

CAST STONE MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cast stone trim, including the following: a. Coping. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for installing cast stone units in unit masonry. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For cast stone units, include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces. 1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar and cast stone. 1. Provide a complete line of manufacturers standard colors and surface textures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with a minimum of 5 years experience producing cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project, that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. C. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through single source from single manufacturer. D. Mockups: Furnish cast stone for installation in mockups specified in Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery of cast stone with masonry work to avoid delaying the Work and to minimize the need for on-site storage. B. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets. 1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports. 2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with non-staining, waterproof covers, securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.


1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40°F (4°C) and above and will remain so until cast stone has dried, but no fewer than seven days after completing cleaning. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CAST STONE MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following: B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, containing not more than 0.60% total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce cast stone color selected. C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast stone textures and colors. D. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33, gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast stone textures and colors. E. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, non-fading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. F. Admixtures: Use only admixtures specified or approved in writing by Architect. 1. Do not use admixtures that contain more than 0.1% water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. 2. Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturer to be compatible with cement and other admixtures used. 3. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Add to mixes for units exposed to the exterior at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in an air content of 4% to 6%, except do not add to zero-slump concrete mixes. 4. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 5. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 6. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E. G. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Use galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2” (38 mm) of cast stone material. 1. Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775/A 775M. 2. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767/A 767M. H. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M 2.2 CAST STONE UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Memorial Designs 1517 Old Dunbar Rd West Columbia, S.C. 29172 (803) 755-1200 2. Cast Stone Systems, Inc. 532 N Main St Warrenton, N.C. 27589 (252) 257-1599 3. Melton Classics, Inc. 175 Langley Dr. Lawrenceville, GA 30046 (800) 963-3060


4. Pedroni’s Cast Stone 5169 Edgewood Ct. Jacksonville, FL 32254 (904) 783-1690 B. Regional Materials: Cast stone units shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from aggregates[ and cement] that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. C. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using either the vibrant dry tamp or wet-cast method. 1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666/C 666M, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364. D. Fabricate units with sharp arris and accurately reproduced details, with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated. E. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8” (3 mm). 2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8” (3 mm), whichever is greater, but in no case by more than ¼” (6 mm). 3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8” (3 mm), whichever is greater. 4. Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary from indicated position by more than 1/8” (3 mm) on formed surfaces of units and 3/8” (10 mm) on unformed surfaces. F. Cure units as follows: 1. Cure units in enclosed moist curing room at 95% to 100% relative humidity and temperature of 100°F (38°C) for 12 hours or 70°F (21°C) for 16 hours. 2. Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following: a. No fewer than five days at mean daily temperature of 70°F (21° C) or above. b. No fewer than six days at mean daily temperature of 60°F (16°C) or above. c. No fewer than seven days at mean daily temperature of 50°F (10°C) or above. d. No fewer than eight days at mean daily temperature of 45°F (7°C) or above. G. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view. H. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. I. Color and Texture: Provide units with fine-grained texture and buff color resembling Indiana limestone. 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Provide mortar materials that comply with Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry." B. Regional Materials: Aggregate for mortar, cement, and lime shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. E. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. F. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. G. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:


1. Lafarge North America Inc.; Lafarge Mortar Cement or Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement. H. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, B. Dowels: ½” (12 mm) diameter, round bars, fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. 2.5 MORTAR MIXES A. Comply with requirements in Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for mortar mixes. B. Do not use admixtures including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR A. Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry." B. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances 1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place. 2. Coordinate installation of cast stone with installation of flashing specified in other Sections. C. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar. D. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set units with joints 3/8” (10 mm) wide unless otherwise indicated. 2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 4. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 5. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 6. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to receive sealant. 7. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant. E. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than ¾” (19 mm). Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked. F. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8” (10 mm). Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. G. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. H. Provide sealant joints at copings and other horizontal surfaces, at expansion, control, and pressure- relieving joints, and at locations indicated.


1. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Build in compressible foam-plastic joint fillers where indicated. 3. Form joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8” (10 mm). 4. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated. 5. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 90 00 "Joint Protection." 3.3 SETTING ANCHORED CAST STONE WITH SEALANT-FILLED JOINTS A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. 1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place. 2. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set cast stone in locations indicated with uniform joints. B. Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between back of cast stone units and backup wall; do not fill cavities with mortar or grout. C. Fill anchor holes with sealant. 1. Where dowel holes occur at pressure-relieving joints, provide compressible material at ends of dowels. D. Set cast stone supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths. Hold shims back from face of cast stone a distance at least equal to width of joint. E. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Remove temporary shims and spacers from joints after anchors and supports are secured in place and cast stone units are anchored. Do not begin sealant installation until temporary shims and spacers are removed. 1. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8” (10 mm) F. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated. G. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 90 00 "Joint Protection." 3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed ¼” in 20’ (6 mm in 6 m), maximum. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8” in 10’ (3 mm in 3 m) maximum. C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8” in 36” (3 mm in 900 mm) or one- fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less. D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16” (1.5 mm), except where variation is due to warpage of units within tolerances specified. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses. 1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as follows:


1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of cast stone. 3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean cast stone by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 05 44 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL TRUSSES 05 44 00-1

SECTION 05 44 00

COLD-FORMED METAL TRUSSES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cold-formed steel trusses for roofs. 2. Cold-formed steel framing at overhangs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 40 00 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for cold-formed steel studs, joists, and rafters. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel trusses; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel trusses. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. 1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified testing agency, indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."


1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold-formed steel trusses from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Aegis Metal Framing B. MarinoWARE C. TrusSteel 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing. B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Design trusses to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. b. Roof soffit framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120°F (67°C). C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards: 1. Floor and Roof Systems: Design according to AISI S210. 2. Roof Trusses: Design according to AISI S214. 2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL TRUSS MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, structural grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Coating: G60 (Z180), or equivalent. 2.4 ROOF TRUSSES A. Roof Truss Members: Manufacturer's standard steel sections. 1. Connecting Flange Width: 1-5/8” (41 mm), minimum at top and bottom chords connecting to sheathing or other directly fastened construction. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428” (1.09 mm), top and bottom chord members. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, structural grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for truss members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by.


C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and Appendix D in ACI 318, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency. D. Power-Actuated Fasteners: Fastener system of type suitable for application, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B. B. Shims: Load bearing, of high-density multi-monomer plastic, non-leaching; or of cold-formed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed steel trusses and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate trusses using jigs or templates. 2. Cut truss members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel truss members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel trusses by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace trusses to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated trusses to prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8” in 10’ (1:960) and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8” (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8” (3 mm). PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting cold-formed steel trusses for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install, bridge, and brace cold-formed steel trusses according to AISI S200, AISI S214, AISI's "Code of Standard Practice for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing," and manufacturers written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Install cold-formed steel trusses and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.


1. Fasten cold-formed steel trusses by welding or mechanical fasteners. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings; comply with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. C. Install temporary bracing and supports. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. D. Truss Spacing: As indicated. E. Do not alter, cut, or remove framing members or connections of trusses. F. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other, align, and accurately position at spacings indicated. G. Erect trusses without damaging framing members or connections. H. Coordinate with wall framing to align webs of bottom chords and load-bearing studs or continuously reinforce track to transfer loads to structure. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points. I. Install continuous bridging and permanently brace trusses as indicated on Shop Drawings and designed according to CFSEI's TechNote 551e, "Design Guide: Permanent Bracing of Cold-Formed Steel Trusses." J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8” in 10’ (1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual trusses no more than plus or minus 1/8” (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold- formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensures that cold-formed metal trusses are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING REBNOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 05 50 00 – METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-1

SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for countertops 2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 4. Shelf angles 5. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections 6. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards 7. Metal floor plate and supports B. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include the following: 1. Loose steel lintels 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications 1. Include plans, elevations, sections and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections 3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation B. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing C. Welding certificates D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code – Steel” 2. AWS D1.2 “Structural Welding Code – Aluminum” 3. AWS D1.3 “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel” 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other constructions contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete insert, anchor bolts and items with integral anchors that are to be imbedded in concrete. Deliver such items to Project Site in time for completion


B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project Site in time for installation. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include but are not limited to products specified 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to manufacturers specified 2.2 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names or blemishes. 2.3 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 Cold-Formed Steel Tubing C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. D. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with MFMA-3 1. Size of Channels: 1 5/8” x 1 5/8” 2. Material: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B, with G90 coating; 0.018” nominal thickness E. Cast Iron: ASTM A48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 2.4 NON-FERROUS METALS A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6 B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6 2.5 FASTENERS A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless- steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade and class required. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular, hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 63; and where indicated, flat washers C. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless steel bolts, nuts and where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1 D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. E. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to four (4) times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency 1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5


2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welding B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead and chromate free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79 1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420g/L (3.5lb/gal) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) C. Use primer-containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-content-dust paint for re-galvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 E. Bituminous paint: Cold-applied emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187 F. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications 2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Pre-assemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation B. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. C. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. 2. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface E. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous F. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screw and similar items G. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Spare anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete;, equip with integrally welded steel trap anchors, 1/8” by 1-1/2”, with a minimum 6” embedment and 2” hook, not less than 8” from ends and corners of units and 24” o.c., unless otherwise indicated 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware, hangers and similar items 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated 2. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated


2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates and bars for profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible B. Provide cutout, fittings and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous steel trim, where indicated D. Prime interior miscellaneous steel trim, where not indicated to be galvanized with zinc-rich primer 2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly 2.11 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by ZZ comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevations, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap 3. Remove welding flux immediately 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts and other connectors E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or similar construction F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings


3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 06 10 00 – ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-1

SECTION 06 10 00

ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber 2. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section “Finish Carpentry” for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Material certificates for dimensional lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species in grade selected for each use as well as design values approved by the Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee. C. Wood treatment data as follows including chemical treatment, manufacturer’s instructions for handling, storing, installation and finishing of treated material. 1. For each type of preservative treated wood product include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained and compliance with applicable standards. 2. For water-borne treated products include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to Project Site. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations for Treated Wood: Obtain each type of treated wood product through one source from a single producer.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials.

1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with water-borne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 “American Softwood Lumber Standard” and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee’s (ALSC) Board of Review.


B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them with lumber grades and species include the following: 1. SPIB – Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 2. WCLIB – West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspecting agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing and mill. D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. 1. Provide dressed lumber. S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19% man moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2” or less nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Roof sheathing shall be Exterior Grade Exposure thickness shall be 5/8” 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER A. For light framing (2” to 4” thick, 2” to 4” wide), provide the following grade and species: 1. “Standard” grade 2. Southern Pine graded under SPIB rules 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AISI type 304, stainless steel. B. Nails, Wire, Brads and Staples: FS FF-N-105 C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1 E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1 F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts, and where indicated, flat washers. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water repellent Preservative: NWWDA tested and accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-proponyl butyl carbonate IPBC as its active ingredient. 2.5 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. General: where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated wood or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Current Standards. Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements. B. Pressure treat above ground items with water borne preservative to a max retention of 0.25 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a max moisture content of, respectively, 19% and 15%. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. C. Complete fabrications of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.


PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.

D. Countersink nail heads or screws and fill holes with wood filler. 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking and sleepers where required for attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 06 20 00 – FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-1

SECTION 06 20 00

FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Section, apply to the work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Definition: Finish carpentry includes carpentry work which is exposed to view, in non-structural, and which is not specified as part of other sections.

B. Types of finish carpentry work in the section include: 1. Exterior running and standing trim. 2. Interior running and standing trim. C. Rough carpentry is specified in another Division 6 Section.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency identification; except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish and submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Submit the following samples for each species and cut pattern of finish carpentry: 1. Interior and Exterior Finish standing and running wood trim.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect finish, carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.

B. Do not deliver finish carpentry materials until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which

could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Conditioning: Installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for finish carpentry and installation areas. Do not install finish carpentry until required temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation areas as required to maintain moisture content of

installed finish carpentry within a 1.0% tolerance of optimum moisture content, from date of installation through remainder of construction period. The fabricator of the woodwork shall determine optimum moisture content and required temperature.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS QUALITY STANDARDS

A. Softwood Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting agency for the species and product indicated.

B. Plywood Standard: Comply with PS/1 ANSI A199.1.


C. Hardwood Lumber Standard: Comply with National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) rules. D. Hardwood Plywood Standard: Comply with PS 51. E. Woodworking Standard: Where indicated for a specific product, comply with specified provision of the

following: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) “Quality Standards”.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: 1. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimension. Provide dressed or worked

and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as required by PS 20. 2. Moisture Content of Hardwood Lumber: Provide seasoned (KD) lumber having a moisture

content from the time of manufacture until time of installation within the ranges required in the referenced woodworking standard.

3. Lumber for Transparent Finish (Stained or Clear): Use pieces made of solid lumber stock. 4. Lumber for Painted Finish: At Contractor’s option, use pieces which are either glued-up lumber

or made of solid lumber stock. B. Exterior Finish Carpentry: 1. Standing and Running Trim: a. Species: Fir 1) Grade: Clear VG b. Species: Western Red Cedar, WWPA or WCLIB 1) Grade: B and Better 1 and 2 Clear c. Species: Southern Yellow Pine SYB 1) Grade: No. 1 d. Species: Cypress 1) Grade: Select Clear e. Contractor’s Option: Provide either species listed above. f. Texture: Surfaced (smooth) 2. Plywood for Painted Finish: Any softwood species exterior type, maximum density overlay

(MDO/EXT-APA, of thickness indicated). C. Interior Finish Carpentry: 1. Standing and Running Trim for Painted Finish: Any Western softwood species graded and

inspected by WWPA complying with the following requirements: a. Grade for Standard Sizes and Patterns: “C Select” or “Choice” for Idaho White Pine, “C”

for Southern Yellow Pine. b. Grade for Special (custom) Sizes and Patterns: Custom for quality of materials and

manufacture as required in referenced woodworking standard. Patterns mouldings shall be equal to moulding manufactured by S & S Craftsmen, Inc. 1.800.922.9663.

2. Standing and Running Trim for Transparent Finish: Plain sawn Red Oak, manufactured to sizes and patterns (profile) shown from selected First Grade Lumber (NHLA); complying with the following grade requirements of referenced woodworking standard, for quality materials and manufacture.

a. Grade: Custom, clear D. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devices of the type, size,

material and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible, and complying with applicable Federal Specifications.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Condition wood materials to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated, not adequately seasoned or too small to fabricate work with minimum of joints or optimum jointing arrangements, or which are of defective manufacture with respect to surfaces, sizes or patterns. B. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8” in 8’0” for plumb and level countertops; and within 1/16” maximum offset in flush adjoining 1/8” maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor finish carpentry work to anchorage devices or blocking built-in directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing nail for exposed nailings, countersunk and filled flush with finished surface, and matching final finish where transparent is indicated.

3.3 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry work wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed finish carpentry work.

C. Protection: Installer of finish carpentry work shall advise Contractor of final protection and maintained

conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage at time of acceptance.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 07 21 16 - INSULATION 07 21 16-1

SECTION 07 21 16

INSULATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Thermal resistivity or r-value represents the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1" thick and are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the two exposed faces required to cause 1 BTU to flow throughout 1 sq. ft. per hr. at mean temperatures indicated. 1.3 STANDARDS A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation with fire performance characteristics indicated per ASTM E 119, ASTM E 84 and E 136, as applicable, and which correspond to products listed in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or "Building Materials Directory". B. Maximum Allowable Asbestos Content: Less than 0.25% by weight of asbestos of any type or mixture of types occurring naturally as impurities, as determined by polarized light microscopy test per Appendix A of 40 CFR 763. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for each form and type of insulation indicated. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. General: Provide preformed units in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thickness, widths and lengths. 2.2 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION A. ASTM C 578, Type as indicated below; with 5-year aged r-values of 5.4 and 5 at 40°F and 75°F (4.4°C and 23.9°C), respectively; and as follows: 1. Type X, 1.35 lb./cu. ft. min. density. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 5 and

165, respectively. 2.3 MOLDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD INSULATION A. ASTM C 578, Type as indicated below: 1. Type I, 0.9 lb./cu. ft. min. density, aged r-value of 4.0 and 3.6 at 40°F and 75°F (4.4°C and

23.9°C), respectively. 2. Type II, 1.3 lb./cu. ft. min. density, aged r-value of 4.4 and 4.0 at 40°F and 75°F (4.4°C and

23.9°C), respectively. 3. Type VIII, 1.15 lb./cu. ft. min. density, aged r-value of 4.2 and 3.8 at 40°F and 75°F (4.4°C and

23.9°C), respectively. 4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 75 and

175, respectively. 2.4 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE (XPS) RIGID FOAM INSULATION A. Rigid, cellular thermal insulation board closed-cell-foam board, aged r-value of R5 per ASTM C 578.

Equal to Owens Corning “Foamular 150.”

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 07 21 16 - INSULATION 07 21 16-2

2.5 FACED MINERAL FIBER BLANKET/BATT INSULATION A. ASTM C 665 for Type III, Class A (blankets with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing with flame

spread of 25 or less); kraft vapor-retarder membrane on one face, respectively; and as follows: 1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag. B. Combustion Characteristics: Unfaced materials passes ASTM E 136 test. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed value of 25 and

50, respectively. C. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2.6 ACOUSTICAL BATTS A. Comply with ASTM C 665, Type II, Class C. Owens Corning Quiet Zone Acoustical or an approved equal.

For interior partition walls only. Acoustical sound batts above ceilings shall be poly (breathable) encapsulated.

2.7 OPEN CELL FOAM INSULATION A. R-20, MDI based polyurethane semi-rigid foam insulation, coated with an approved thermal barrier.

Consult local building code officials to ensure the application meets local building codes and regulations

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions for installation of insulation. B. Support insulation units by adhesive or mechanical anchorage or both as applicable to location and

conditions indicated.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 07 41 13.16 – STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 07 41 13.16-1

SECTION

07 41 13.16

STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes standing-seam metal roof panels. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Review flashings, special details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect metal panels. B. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable. C. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel systems during and after installation. D. Review procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation. E. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Test Reports

2.

: For roof materials, documentation indicating that roof materials comply with Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) requirements.

Product Data

: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and pre-consumer recycled content and cost.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. 2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 3” per 12” (1:5)

.

D. Calculations: 1. Include calculations with registered engineer seal, verifying roof panel and attachment method resist wind pressures imposed on it pursuant to applicable building codes. E. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. F. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Metal Panels: 12”

long by actual panel width. Include clips, fasteners, closures, and other metal panel accessories.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


C. Field quality-control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in architectural sheet metal products. B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical roof area and eave, including fascia and soffit as shown on Drawings; approximately 48” 2. Build mockups for typical roof area only, including accessories.

square by full thickness, including attachments, underlayment, and accessories.

a. Size: 48 by 48 inches b. Each type of exposed seam and seam termination.

.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels until installation. Remove as panels are being installed. Verify film is not left on installed panels. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. B. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Galvalume Substrate Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including rupturing, or perforating. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.


2. Warranty Period: 20 years and six months from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, chipping, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Watertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's no-dollar-limit form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain watertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Shop drawings must be provided to, reviewed, and approved by panel manufacturer prior to panel system installation. 3. Inspections by panel system manufacturer technical representative are required. Perform first inspection when underlayment and flashing are in place and second inspection when the roof is complete. D. Special Installer Warranty: Furnish a written warranty signed by Panel Applicator guaranteeing materials and workmanship for watertightness of the roofing system, flashings, penetrations, and against all leaks. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Recycled Content

: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 29%.

B. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span. C. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft.

1. Test-Pressure Difference:

when tested according to ASTM E 1680 and ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:

6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

D.

1. Test-Pressure Difference:

Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 and ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:

15 lbf/sq. ft.

E. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift- resistance class indicated. 1. Uplift Rating: UL 90. F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120°F ambient; 180° material surfaces. 2.2 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514.


2. Aluminum Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1637. B. Seamed-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and panel striations between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels, engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Berridge Manufacturing Company; Zee-Lock (90o

2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M,

seam)

Class AZ55

a. Nominal Thickness:

coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil- coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

0.029 inch b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.

.

c. Painted materials shall have a removable plastic film to protect the paint during roll forming, shipping and handling. d. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 3. Clips: Zee-Clip to accommodate thermal movement. a. Material: 0.024-inch

4. Joint Type: Single folded.

nominal thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminum-zinc alloy- coated steel sheet.

5. Panel Coverage: 6. Panel Height:

16 inches 2.0 inches

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide self-adhering, cold-applied, sheet underlayment, a minimum of 40 mils

1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at

thick, consisting of slip-resistant, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

240°F 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus

; ASTM D 1970. 20°F

3. ; ASTM D 1970.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Mid-States Asphalt Quick Stick HT Pro. b. Polyglass Polystick MTS. c. Soprema Lastobond Shield HT. d. Tamko TW Underlayment or TW Metal & Tile Underlayment. e. Owens Corning 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645; cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, hot-dip galvanized coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system. B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels. D. Gutters: Formed from same material as roof panels, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96 inch long sections, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced a maximum of 36 inches

o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at outlets. Finish gutters to match metal roof panels.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=6906�

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457046510�

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457046510�

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=6911�


E. Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate in 10-foot

long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Finish downspouts to match gutters.

F. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from same material as roof panels, 0.029-inch nominal thickness; galvalume or stainless steel; supply an integral full-length cricket for curbs wider than 24 inches supported by a structural metal deck. Fabricate curb flashing from 0.029 inch. On open framing, provide roof underlayment and decking at and about roof curb per roofing manufacturer's written instructions. Maintain a minimum of one-half of roofing panel width on each side of roof curb, and start panels a minimum of 9 inches

up slope of roof curb, flashing roofing panels to roof curb per roofing manufacturer's written instructions.. Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads of size and height of roof top equipment. Where required insulate roof curbs with rigid insulation.

G. Panel Fasteners: Zinc-coated steel, corrosion-resisting steel, zinc cast head, or nylon capped steel; type and size as approved for applicable loading requirements. H. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish. 1. Joint Sealant: Silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal panels may be fabricated on-site using factory-set, non-adjustable, portable roll-forming equipment if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown. C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards. 3. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.6 FINISHES A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Steel Panels and Accessories: 1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat applied by panel manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line, with a top side dry film thickness of 0.75 ±0.05 mil over 0.2 ±0.05-mil primer coat, to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95 ±0.10 mil. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.


PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated below, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 36 inches

1. Apply over the entire roof surface.

. Extend underlayment down fascia. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days or as directed by underlayment product manufacturer.

B. Flashings: Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.4 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels to be level to 1/4 inch in 20 feet 2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed.

.

3. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 4. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds. 5. Panels should be continuous without end laps. 6. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten. 7. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels. B. Fasteners: 1. Steel Panels: Use stainless steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galvanized- steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. C. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.


E. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates, if required, at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied vinyl weatherseal are completely engaged. F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal roof panel manufacturers; or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. H. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 36 inches

o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.

I. Downspouts: Join sections with telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches

1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.

o.c. in between.

J. Roof Curbs: Install flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels. K. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch

offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing. B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.


B. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 07 42 93 – METAL SOFFIT PANELS 07 42 93 - 1

SECTION 07 42 93

METAL SOFFIT PANELS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. 2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches (1:5)

.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied finishes. 1. Include Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Metal Panels: 12 inches

long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other metal panel accessories.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in architectural sheet metal products. B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.


1. Build mockup of typical metal soffit panel assembly as indicated on Drawings, including corner, soffits, supports, attachments, and accessories. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Remove strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation. Do not leave film on installed panels. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Galvalume Substrate Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including rupturing or perforating. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years and six months from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, chipping, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 29%. 2.2 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.


B. V-Groove-Profile, Concealed-Fastener Metal Soffit Panels: Formed with vertical panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between panel edges. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Berridge Manufacturing Company; Vee-Panel. 2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 Class AZ55

a. Nominal Thickness:

coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

0.024 inch b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.

.

c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 3. Panel Coverage: 12.75 inches 4. Panel Height:

0.375 inch

2.3

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 hot-dip galvanized coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50

aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed- cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch

thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels. D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners. E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish. 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

thick.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs for full length of panel. C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.


2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.5 FINISHES A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Steel Panels and Accessories: 1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat applied by panel manufacturer on continuous coil coating line, with top-side dry film thickness of 0.75 ±0.05 mil over 0.2 ±0.05-mil primer coat, to provide total dry film thickness of 0.95± 0.10 mil

. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer. 2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer. a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.3 METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels. 2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal panels are installed.


3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds. 6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws. 8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels. B. Fasteners: 1. Steel Panels: Use stainless steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; use galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. D. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure. 2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal panels. 3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer. 4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 5. Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings. E. Watertight Installation: 1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight. 2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch

end lap, sealed with sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal wall panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer. G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch

deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect completed metal wall panel installation, including accessories. B. Remove and replace metal soffit panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.


C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 07 62 00 – SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-1

SECTION 07 62 00

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes flashings and counterflashings, soffits, gutters and downspouts and fabricated sheet metal items, as indicated in Schedule. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Sheet Metal System: Conform to criteria of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 1. Gutters: SMACNA Details. 2. Downspouts: SMACNA Details. 3. Flashings: SMACNA Details. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, termination, and installation details. B. Samples: Submit two samples, 1” in size of each type of formed metal flashing illustrating typical seam, external corner, internal corner, material, color, and finish. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with 2017 Florida Building Code. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Product Description: Flashing and sheet metal; unfinished or prefinished, splash pads pans, and accessories. Match existing where applicable. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/240M; Type 304, dead soft fully annealed, 0.050” thick; smooth surface, smooth surface. B. Aluminum Sheet Metal: ASTM B209, 5005 or 3003-H14 aluminum alloy as appropriate, 0.050” thick, epoxy coated. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers. B. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. Bituminous. C. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper. D. Sealant: Exterior metal lap joint butyl or polyisobutylene sealant as specified in Section 07 90 00. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet, to interlock with sheet.

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 07 62 00 – SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-2

B. Hem exposed edges on underside ½”; miter and seam corners. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward ¼” and hemmed to form drip. C. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2” min over roofing material. Return and brake edges. D. Form material flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners in one piece, 18” long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective backing paint to minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats. B. Install surface mounted reglets. Seal top of reglets with sealant. Insert flashings to form tight fit. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 07 92 00 – JOINT SEALANT 07 92 00-1

SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of each form and type of joint sealer is indicated on drawings and as herein noted. B. This section includes joint sealers for the following locations: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic surfaces as listed below: a. Control and expansion joints in cast in place concrete b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry and cement plaster c. joints between materials listed above d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows e. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces f. Other joints as indicated, and needed 2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces as listed below: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated c. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior units masonry and concrete walls and partitions d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and elevator entrances e. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures f. Other joints as indicated, and needed 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES A. Provide joint sealers that have been produces and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data from manufacturers for each joint sealer product required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application. B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Manufacturer’s standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. C. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within the last three years at least three joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this Project. B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.


B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturers. 2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of joint sealers to occur not less than 21 or more than 30 days after completion of waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALERS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. B. One-Part Polysulfide Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 12-½; Uses NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. C. One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. One-Part Polysulfide Sealant: a. “Chem-Calk 100”, Bostik Construction Products Div.

b. “GC-9 Synthacalk”, Pecora Corporation c. “PRC Rubber Calk 7000”, Product Research and Chemical Corp.

2. One-Part Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: a. “Dow Corning 786”, Dow Corning Co. “SCS b. 1702 Sanitary”, General Electric Co. “863 c. #345 White”, Pecora Corp. “Rhodorsil 6B d. White” Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. “Proglaze e. White”, Tremco Corp. f. “OmniPlus” Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS JOINT SEALANTS A. Butyl-Polyisobutylene Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard, solvent-release-curing, butyl polyisobutylene sealant complying with AAMA 809.2, recommended for concealed joints.


B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Acoustical Sealants for Concealed Joints a. “BA-98”, Pecora Corporation b. “Tremco Acoustical Sealant”, Tremco, Inc.

2. Butyl-Polyisobutylene Sealant: a. “PTI 404”, Protective Treatments, Inc.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Provide type of recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealer-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide non-staining, chemical cleaners of type which are

acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service performance.

C. Masking Tape: Provide non-staining, nonabsorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to

surfaces adjacent to joints.

D. Accessory Materials for Fire-Stopping Sealants: Provide forming, joint fillers, packing and other accessory materials required for installation of fire-stopping sealants as applicable to installation conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of

joint sealer, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealers, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint substrate surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing our joints with oil-free compressed air.

3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces or ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer

manufacturer based in preconstruction joint sealer-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer’s recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining

surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS

A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers’ printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.


B. Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated.

C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during applications and at

position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and

replace with dry material.

D. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint fillers, compression seals, or back of joints where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant failure. 1. Install compressible seals serving as sealant backings to comply with requirements

indicated above for joint fillers. a. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in

sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross- sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or

curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 6A in ASTM C 962, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progress by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealer installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 08 11 13 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-1

SECTION 08 11 13

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Fully galvanized standard hollow metal doors and frames for new and replacement of existing exterior doors and frames. 2. Standard hollow metal door frames for new interior doors. 3. Hardware for new doors is included in Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware and Section 08 78 00, Special Function Hardware.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 09 Section “Painting” and “Interior Painting” for field painting hollow metal doors and frames.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire resistance rating and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thickness 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profile and metal thickness 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware 5. Details of each different wall opening condition 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices and connections 7. Details of accessories 8. Details of moldings, removable stops and glazing 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal and control systems

C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Provide with door hardware schedule.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing

agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at a positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Temperature – Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450° F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.



A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to

jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project Site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4” high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum ¼” space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project Site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Provide products by one of the following: 1. Steelcraft, an Ingersoll-Rand Company (existing doors and basis of design) 2. Architectural Openings, Inc. 3. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 4. Ceco Door Products: an Assa Abloy Group company 5. Curries Company: an Assa Abloy Group company 6. Habersham Metal Products Company 7. Pioneer Industries

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum

G60 or A60 metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill

phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,

fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips of other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4”, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C

143M.


H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing): consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6 to 12 lb/cu ft density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke development indexes of 25 and 50 respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section “Glazing”. J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film

thickness per coat. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer’s standard polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board or vertical steel-stiffener core. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated. b. Thermal-Rated (insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0° F x h x sq. ft./BTU when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer’s standard. a. Beveled Edge: 1/8” in 2” 4. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2 1/8” radius. 5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042” thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, “Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames”

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying

with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless). 2. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same

material as door face sheets.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold or hot rolled steel sheet. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Exterior and Interior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as fill profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Exterior frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: minimum 14 gauge 0.067” thick steel sheet.

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from

same material as frames. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042” thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2” wide by 10” long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177” thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.42” thick. 3. Post-Installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8” diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pip spacer from frame to wall with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.


B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042” thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.6 STOPS AND MOULDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032” thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8” high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032” thick, fabricated from same material as

frames in which they are installed. 2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames; not less than 0.016” thick 2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warps or buckles. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer’s plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project Site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. C. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut opening in doors. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating where indicated. Extend minimum ¾” beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations,

provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Provide countersunk, flat or oval head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four (4) spot welds per anchor. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Post-installed Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6’ from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26” on center. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction: a. Single Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three (3) door silencers. b. Double Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two (2) door silencers.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels and hardware reinforcement from either cold or hot

rolled steel sheet.

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section “Door Hardware.” 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface mounted door hardware 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specification for preparations of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 16 Sections.


G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stop and moldings around glazed lites and transoms where indicated.

Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer’s standard primer immediately after cleaning and pre-treating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer’s standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

2.10 HARDWARE

A. Refer to Division 08 Section “Finish Hardware: for hardware requirements and schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to

performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filing, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16”, measured at door rabbet on a line 90° from jamb perpendicular to a frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16”, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16”, measure at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16”, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface-mounted door

hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.


1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire protection rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress and make splice smooth, flush and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and squared. f. Check plumbness, squareness and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing anti-freezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with post-installed expansion anchors. 3. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16”, measured at door rabbet on a line 90° from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16”, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16”, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16”, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearance specified below.

Shim as necessary. 1. Non Fire Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8” plus or minus 1/16”. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8” plus or minus 1/16”. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8”. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum ¾”. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearance according to NFPA80.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section “Glazing” and with hollow metal

manufacturer’s written instruction. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat or oval head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9” on center and not more than 2” on center from each corner.

E. Hardware: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as approved by the Owner’s

Locksmith. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime

coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to

manufacturer’s written instructions.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 08 14 00 – WOOD DOORS 08 14 00-1

SECTION 08 14 00

WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pre-fit and pre-machined wood doors. 2. Pre-Finished Wood Doors

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry 2. Section 06 20 00 – Finish Carpentry 3. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 4. Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

1. Submit in accordance with Section 01 32 19 2. Indicate general construction, jointing methods, hardware and louver locations, and locations of cut-outs for glass. Indicate thickness of veneers.

B. Samples:

1. Submit samples of full range of wood veneer and factory finishing in accordance with ANSI/WDMA Quality Standards I.S. 1-A 1997, sections G-18 and Guide Specifications 1.03C.

C. Certification: 1. Submit certification stating that doors and frames comply with UBC 7-2 1997 or UL10c, Positive Pressure Fire Door Test Method.

1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Plastic wrap and protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling or deterioration. Follow the Care and Installation guidelines as described in ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1-A 1997.

B. Upon acceptance on site inspect for damage. Do not store in damp or wet areas. HVAC system should be operating and balanced prior to arrival of the doors and have acceptable humidity conditions ranging from 25% to 50% relative humidity.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards: 1. AWI Quality Standard: “Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards”, of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for grade of door, core construction, finish and other requirements exceeding those of NWWDA quality standard. B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors which are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 152 and which are labelled and listed for ratings indicated by UL, Warnock Hersey, or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY

A. Guarantee: Provide manufacturer’s guarantee for all wood doors. Guarantee period: Lifetime of original installation. Doors exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship within guarantee period shall be replaced (including hanging and finishing) with new doors. These items shall be part of the manufacturer’s standard warranty.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Solid Core Doors with Wood Veneer Faces: a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. b. Chappell Door Company c. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division d. Glen-Mar Door Manufacturing Co. h. Graham Manufacturing Corporation i. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. j. Weyerhauser Company 2.2 INTERIOR 6 PANEL WOOD DOORS A. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Faces: Match existing species 2. AWI Grade: Custom 3. Construction: SLC-5 (Structural Composite Lumber) B. Fire-Rated Solid Core Doors: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Faces and AWI Grade: Provide faces and grades to match non-rated doors in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Construction: Manufacturer’s standard core construction as required to provide fire-resistance rating indicated. 2.3 MATERIALS

A. Door Construction: 1. Non-Fire Rated Doors: Thickness: 1 ¾”, interior 6 panel wood, structural composite lumber (SLC) core conforming to ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1-A 1997 and the following a. Core: Bonded, Structural Composite Lumber Core conforming to ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1-A 1997. b. Door construction shall conform to ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1-A 1997 Premium Grade requirements.

B. Wood Veneer: 1. Interior wood doors : Factory finished, cured polyurethane. Provide full range of stain colors. Match existing stain color.

C. Adhesives:

1. Face to core adhesives shall be per requirements of WDMA 1.5, 1A, C-6. Adhesives must be classified Type I per WDMA TM-6 “Adhesive Bond Test Method” Type I adhesives shall be used for doors in interior application.

D. Core:

1. Non-rated and 20 minute doors: Structural composite lumber. 2. Fire-rated doors: Non-combustible fire resistive composite core containing no asbestos. 3. Acoustic Rated Doors: Special sound core

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate 6 panel wood doors to produce doors complying with the following requirements: 1. Factory pre-fit and pre-machine doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels: a. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for pre-fitting. Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates. b. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory pre-machining. B. Fabricate non-fire rated and fire rated doors with WDMA Quality Standards hardware blocking options. Appropriate blocking shall be included for all doors to receive both surface mounted and mortised hardware. The use of thru-bolts will not be accepted.


C. Bevel lock and hinge edges of single acting doors 3° or 1/8” in 2”. Radius strike edge of double acting swing doors as required by pivot hinge manufacturer. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine door frame installation before hanging doors.

B. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Handle doors in accordance with recommendations of ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1-A, “Care and Installation at

Job Site.”

B. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer’s instructions and of referenced AWI Standard and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No. 80. C. Condition doors to average temperature and humidity in area of installation for not less than 48 hours prior to installation. Store doors per recommendation of ANSI/WDMA I.S> 1-A, “Care and Installation at Job Site.” Pre-fit doors to frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Install in neat and workmanlike manner, free from hammer or tool marks, open joints or slivers. E. Set plumb, level, square and true. Install work after building humidity is at the required acceptable level. F. Replace all doors found to be warped, twisted, bowed or otherwise damaged. Do not install doors which cannot be properly fitted to frames. G. Adjust prefinished doors and hardware and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.3 CLEANING/PROTECTION

A. Clean doors and hardware.

B. Replace finished door damaged during transit, storage and installation.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 08 41 13 – ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 41 13-1

SECTION 08 41 13

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of aluminum entrance and storefront work: 1. Exterior entrance doors. 2. Frames for entrances. 3. Storefront-type framing system and fixed glass windows. 4. Interior Entrance Doors. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Glazing requirements for aluminum entrances and storefronts, including entrances specified to be factory glazed, are included in Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing". 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies that comply with performance characteristics specified, as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's corresponding stock assemblies according to test methods indicated. B. Thermal Movement: Design the aluminum entrance and storefront framing systems to provide for expansion and contraction of the component materials. Entrance doors shall function normally over the specified temperature range. 1. The system shall be capable of withstanding a metal surface temperature range of 180°F (100°C) without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on structural elements, damaging loads in fasteners, reduction of performance, stress on glass, or other detrimental effects. C. Design Requirements: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems that comply with performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated. 1. Wind Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction of the American Society of Civil Engineers’ ASCE 7-10 “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,” 6.4.2, “Analytical Procedure,” whichever are more stringent. 2. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1/175 of clear span or ¾”, whichever is smaller, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Static-Pressure Test Performance: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not evidence material failures, structural distress, failure of operating components to function normally, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2% of clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330. a. Test Pressure: 150% of inward and outward wind-load design pressures. b. Duration: As required by wind velocity; fastest 1 mile of wind for relevant exposure category. 4. Dead Loads: Provide entrance and storefront system members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75% of design dimension when carrying full dead load. a. Provide a minimum 1/8” clearance between members and top of glazing or other fixed part immediately below. b. Provide a minimum 1/16” clearance between members and operable windows and doors. 5. Live Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate the supporting structures’ deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation. 6. Air Infiltration: Provide entrance and storefront systems with permanent resistance wot air leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.


7. Water Penetration: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 10% of inward-acting wind-load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7-10 “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,” but not less than 6.24lbf/sq. ft. Water leakage is defined as follows: a. Uncontrolled water infiltrating systems or appearing on systems’ normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained back to the exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not water leakage. 8. Condensation Resistance: Provide storefront systems with condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45 when tested according to AAMA 1503.1 9. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide storefront systems with average U-values of not more than 0.63 BTU/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503.1 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division Specification Sections: 1. Product data for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including: a. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods. b. Data on finishing, hardware, and accessories. c. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces. 2. Shop drawings for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required. 3. Hardware Schedule: Submit complete hardware schedule. 4. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Submit pairs of samples of each specified color and finish. 5. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing that aluminum entrance and storefront systems have been tested in accordance with specified test procedures and comply with performance characteristics indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installations of aluminum storefront and entrances similar in design and extent to those required for the project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum entrance and storefront systems from one source and from a single manufacturer. D. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile, and dimensional requirements of aluminum entrance and storefront work required and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Aluminum entrance and storefront by other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the manufacturer's original protective packaging. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: 3 years after the date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering entrance and storefront systems that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amarlite Architectural Products 2. Kawneer Company 3. PPG Industries 4. Tubelite Division of Indal, Inc. 5. YKK AP 6. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope® 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods, and wire. B. Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply with ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates, and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A 570 for hot rolled sheet and strip. C. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section of these specifications. D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard non-corrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of hardware. For application of hardware, use Phillips flat-head machine screws that match finish of member or hardware being fastened. E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179” (26 gage) minimum dead-soft stainless steel, or 0.026” thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other requirements. F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high-strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible, provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123. G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast-iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123. H. Sliding Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.2 2.3 HARDWARE A. General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for requirements for hardware items other than those indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer. B. Provide heavy duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required; finish to match door. 1. Door Stop: Floor- or wall-mounted door stop, as appropriate, with integral rubber bumper; comply with ANSI A156.1, Grade 1. 2. Cylinders are supplied under another Division 8 Section for keying into the building system. 3. Pull Handles: Aluminum pull handles of style indicated, similar to Kawneer "CO9". 4. Push Bars: surface mounted push bar with concealed vertical rods


5. Thresholds: Extruded aluminum threshold of size and design indicated in mill finish, complete with anchors and clips, coordinated with pivots and floor-concealed closers. 6. Weathering System including gasket sweep at door bottom. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Basis of Design: Kawneer TRIFAB VG 450. Provide manufacturer’s standard 1-¾” thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125” thick, extruded tubular rail and stile members similar to the Basis of Design. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie-rods. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Provide manufacturer’s standard snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing stops and preformed gaskets. 2. Stile Design: Medium stile/350. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer’s standard brackets and reinforcements that are compatible with adjacent materials. Provide non-staining, non-ferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required, to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 1. Perform fabrication operations including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes. 2. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site. 3. Pre-glaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible. C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical finish. 1. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished surface. D. Storefront Fixed Glass Windows: The framing system shall [provide for flush glazing on all sides with no projecting stops. Vertical and horizontal framing members shall have a nominal face dimension of 2”. Overall depth shall be 4 ½”. 1. Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. E. Entrances: Fabricate door framing in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads. Factory assemble door and frame units as required for installing hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before finishing components. 1. Exterior Doors: Provide compression weatherstripping at fixed stops. At other locations, provide sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 2. Interior Doors: Provide ANSI/BHMA A156.16 silencers at stops to prevent metal to metal contact. Provide 3 silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and 2 silencers on head of double-door frames. F. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity.


G. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable sealant, or a non-absorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead. H. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of connecting members. 1. Uniformity of Metal Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members shall not have an integral color or texture variation greater than half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal. I. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. J. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weatherstripping against fixed stops. At other edges, provide sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 1. Provide EPDM or vinyl-blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold. 2.6 FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Finish of aluminum entrance and storefront shall be anodized. Color to be selected by Architect. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the installation. 1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. B. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or panels. Install components in proper alignment and elation to established grades and lines indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. C. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after fabrication. 2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum. 3. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other masonry with alkali resistant coating. 4. Paint wood and similar absorptive material in contact with aluminum and exposed to the elements or otherwise subject to wetting, with two coats of aluminum house paint. Seal joints between the materials with sealant. D. Drill and tap frame and doors and apply surface-mounted hardware items. Comply with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. E. Set still members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint filler or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for sealants, fillers, and gaskets. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for weathertight closure.


3.4 CLEANING A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings. B. Clean glass surfaces after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 08 54 13 – FIBERGLASS WINDOWS 08 54 13 -1

SECTION 08 54 13

FIBERGLASS WINDOWS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes fiberglass-framed windows. 1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at 146 Comfort Road, Palatka, FL. 1. Review construction schedule. 2. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of fiberglass windows with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for anchoring, flashing, weeping, sealing perimeters, and protecting finishes. 3. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope. 4. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for fiberglass windows. B. Shop Drawings: For fiberglass windows. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes. 1. Include Samples of hardware, glazing, and accessories involving color selection. D. Product Schedule: For fiberglass windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer, minimum five (5) years experience. B. Product Test Reports: For each type of fiberglass window, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating fiberglass windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports and calculations. B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to fiberglass window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.


1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fiberglass windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, and air infiltration. c. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. d. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units, Non-Laminated: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Glazing Units, Laminated: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain fiberglass windows from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Window Certification: WDMA certified with label attached to each window. B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows: 1. Minimum Performance Class: CW. 2. Minimum Performance Grade: 50. C. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.30 Btu/sq. ft. x h x °F

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pella Corporation; Pella

(1.71 W/sq. m x K) D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window SHGC of 0.20. E. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Rated for not less than 28 STC when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss in accordance with ASTM E90 and determined by ASTM E413. F. Outside-Inside Transmission Class (OITC): Rated for not less than 22 OITC when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss in accordance with ASTM E90 and determined by ASTM E1332. 2.3 FIBERGLASS WINDOWS

® Impervia® or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Accurate Dorwin. 2. Alpen High Performance Products. 3. Inline Fiberglass Ltd. 4. Milgard Manufacturing, Inc. B. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings: 1. Fixed. 2. Operable (Single Hung) C. Frames and Sashes: Pultruded fiberglass complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 and with exposed exterior fiberglass surfaces finished with manufacturer's standard enamel coating complying with AAMA 623. 1. Exterior Color: Dark Bronze 2. Interior Finish: Match Exterior D. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E2190. 1. Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. a. Tint: Match Existing b. Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings or as required by code.


2. Lites: Two. 3. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with argon 4. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second or third surface. E. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal. F. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Dividers (False Muntins): Provide divider grilles in designs indicated for each sash lite. 1. Quantity and Type: Surface mounted on interior & exterior sides of insulated glass. 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Pattern: As indicated on Drawings 4. Profile: 0.75 inch (19 mm) contoured. 5. Color: Match frame color. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate fiberglass windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for installing and anchoring windows. B. Glaze fiberglass windows in the factory. C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation. D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units. E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation. Coordinate with General Contractor and with the stucco subcontractor. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E2112. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.


3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows: 1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance shall be performed in accordance with AAMA 502. 2. Air-Infiltration Testing: a. Test Pressure: That required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/ I.S.2/A440 performance class indicated. b. Allowable Air-Leakage Rate: 1.5 times the applicable AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/ A440 rate for product type and performance class rounded down to one decimal place. 3. Water-Resistance Testing: a. Test Pressure: Two-thirds times test pressure required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance grade indicated. b. Allowable Water Infiltration: No water penetration. 4. Testing Extent: Three windows of each type as selected by Architect and a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested after perimeter sealants have cured. 5. Test Reports: Prepared in accordance with AAMA 502. C. Windows will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning. C. Remove and replace sashes if glass has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 08 71 13 – AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 08 71 13-1

SECTION 08 71 13

AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Low energy automatic door operators for swinging doors. B. Related Sections 1. Section 08 41 13 – Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 2. Section 08 80 00 – Glass and Glazing C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the version year adopted by the authority having jurisdiction 1. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 2. ANSI/BHMA A156.4 – Door Controls, Door Closers 3. ANSI/BHMA A156.19 – Power Assist and Low-Energy Power Operated Doors 4. ICC/IBC – International Building Code 5. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code 6. NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows 7. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code 8. NFPA 105 – Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies 9. UL 325 – Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems 10. State Building Codes, Local Amendments 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Automatic door operators to be used on exterior doors; up to 200 pounds weight and maximum door width of 48”. See drawings for required locations. 1. Automatic door operator capable of operating within temperature ranges of -22°F and 122°F 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic door operators, including activation devices. Include operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Include details and attachments to other work. 1. Include locations and elevations of each unique entrance showing activation devices. 2. Indicate required clearances, components, and location and size of field connections. 3. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and activation wiring. C. Qualification Data: Provide copy of manufacturer’s official certification or accreditation document indicating proof of status as a qualified and authorized installer of automatic door operators and accessories. D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturer’s operating and maintenance manual for each item comprising the automatic door operator installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual shall include the name, address, and contact information of the manufacturer and installer providing the operators and installation. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test to include “as built” modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance. E. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in this Section


1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer’s authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B Certified Installer Qualifications: Locally certified ASSA ABOLY Power Operator Preferred Installer required for the installation and maintenance of the automatic door operator units and accessories indicated for the Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic door operators, including activation devices, from single source, qualified supplier unless otherwise indicated. D. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for doors with automatic door operators serving as a component of a required means of egress. F. Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Provide operators for fire rated door assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors required. G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section “Project Meetings” with attendance by representatives of the Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling and installing automatic door operators. 1. Prior to installation of automatic door operators, arrange for certified installer’s representative to conduct a project specific meeting to review the installation and maintenance of their respective products. Project meeting shall be attended by representatives of related trades furnishing and installing aluminum, hollow metal and wood door sections. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Electrical Systems Coordination: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled automatic door operators and related activation devices, with required connections to source power junction boxes, remote power supplies, access control equipment, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire alarm system. B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved, templates for doors, frames, operators and other work specified to be factory prepared and reinforced for installing automatic door operators. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing automatic door operators to comply with indicated requirements. C. Door and Frame Preparation: Related Division 08 Sections (Steel, Aluminum and Wood) doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified automatic door operators without additional in-field modifications. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other right the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace components of automatic door operators that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Faulty or sporadic operation of automatic door operator, including activation and safety devices. 2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering or use. C. Special Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.


D. Provide extended warranty from defects in material or workmanship under normal use for a period of three (3) years from the date of substantial completion for units installed by a certified ASSA ABLOY Power Operator Preferred Installer in accordance with the manufacturer’s written warranty certificate. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with the specified warranty period, provide continuous full maintenance every six (6) months by skilled employees of automatic door operator installer. Include planned and preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door operation. Provide parts and supplies the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. B. Extended Maintenance Support and Service Agreement: Submit for Owner’s consideration an optional extended Service Agreement for the installed automatic door operator system. The extended Service Agreement is considered elective and is without manufacturer’s requirement stipulating mandatory coverage for Owner and/or Vendor system support. 1. A published copy of this agreement shall be included in the submittal package. 2. Support for the installed automatic door operator system is provided through the vendor under a specified, limited 24 hour support program. 3. Automatic door operators and components are to be available on a one-day turn around time frame from the vendor. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Norton Door Controls (NO) – 5900 X-in Series 2. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – MPower CL4000S Series 2.2 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS – GENERAL A. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation devices. B. Electromechanical Door Operators: Self-contained units powered by permanent magnet DC motor, with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train, connections for power, activation and safety device wiring, and manual operation including spring closing when power is off. C. Electro-hydraulic Door Operators: Self-contained low-pressure units with separate cylinders for power and checking, connections for power, activation and safety device wiring and manual operation including spring closing when power is off. D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer’s standard, fabricated from aluminum with non-ferrous shims for aligning system components. 2.3 LOW-ENERGY DOOR OPERATORS A. Standard: Certified ANSI/BHMA A156.19 1. Performance Requirements: a. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door. b. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening. B. Configuration: Surface mounted. Door operators shall control single swinging and pair of swinging doors. C. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1 accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator to function as a manual door closer with fully adjustable opening and closing forces, with or without electrical power.


1. On-off switch to control power to be key switch operated. D. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing force and speed, backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule interface delay, obstruction recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to 30 seconds. 1. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and specified auxiliary contacts. 2.4 ACTIVATION DEVICES A. General: Provide activation devices in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard, for condition of exposure indicated and for long term, maintenance free operation under normal traffic load operation. Coordinate activation control with electrified hardware and access control interfaces. Activation switches are standard SPST, with optional DPDT availability. B. Push-Plate Switch: Momentary contact door control switch with push-plate actuator. 1. Configuration: Square or round push-plate control switch with single or double gang junction box mounting. Provide post-mounted units at doors indicated on drawings. a. Mounting Location: as indicated on Drawings. 2. Push-Plate Material: Stainless Steel 3. Mounting Post: Stainless Steel 4. Message: International symbol of accessibility with “Push (Press) to Open (Operate)” text C. Touch Less Wall Switch: Momentary contact door control switch with movement required activation. Single or double gang junction box mounting. 1. Doppler radar sensor. 2. Mounting Location: As indicated on Drawings D. Key Switch: Key controlled actuator device enclosed in a single or double gang junction box. 1. Faceplate Material: Stainless Steel 2. Functions: On-off, maintained contact. 3. Two-way Mounting: Recess or surface mounting as indicated on Drawings. E. Wireless or Remote Radio-Control Switch: Manufacturer’s standard radio control system consisting of header mounted receiver and remote transmitter activation device. F. Motion Sensors: Self-contained, unidirectional scanner units with adjustable detection angle pattern and field sizes. 1. Motion sensors require local authority having jurisdiction approval and must not be placed where motion of door can be sensed. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Signage: As required by cited ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard for the type of operator. 2.6 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used to indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer’s standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. Units will be sprayed with a combination of waterborne acrylic and polyester powder coat. C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.


PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, door and frame preparation and reinforcements, power connections, electrical systems interfaces, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic door operators. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install complete automatic door operators according to manufacturer’s written instruction and ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard, including activation devices, control wiring, remote power units if any, connection to the building’s fire alarm system, and required signage. B. Signage: Apply signage as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard for type of door operator and direction of pedestrian travel. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Certified installer’s representative to inspect and test automatic door operators to determine compliance of installed systems with specifications and ANSI/BHMA A146.19 standard. Report any discrepancies in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours after inspection. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Comply with requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard. Adjust automatic door operators to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Certified installer’s representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel in the proper adjustment, operation, and maintenance of automatic door operators.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 08 80 00 – GLASS AND GLAZING 08 80 00-1

SECTION 08 80 00

GLASS AND GLAZING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This Section describes the required materials and installation standards for all glass and glazing including, but not limited to: interior and exterior windows, sidelights, door lights and observation ports. 1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications: 1. Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors 2. Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors 3. Cellular Elastomeric Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material 4. Staining and Color Change of Single or Multicomponent Joint Sealants 5. Volatility of Oil and Resin Based, Knife Grade, Channel Glazing Compounds 6. Standard Specification for Flat Glass C. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI): 1. 797.1-75 – Performance Specification and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material used in Buildings D. Consumer Products Safety Commission (CPSC) Standard: 1. 16 CFR – Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials, January 1977, Part 1201 E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publication: 1. 80-1977 Fire Doors and Windows F. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Publications: 1. Glazing Manual – 1974 Edition 2. Glazing, Sealing Systems Manual, First Edition, 1970 G. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) Publication: 1. SG-1-70 Dense Rubber-Like Compression Gasket Material 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 32 19 – SUBMITTALS PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. See drawings for location of each type of glass specified herein. Unless otherwise shown, all door lights and sidelights, entrance ways and high traffic areas shall be glazed with safety glazing materials conforming to CPC 16 CFR, Part 1201. B. All exterior glass and glazing systems shall meet the requirements of ASCE 7-10. C. All glazing within 48” of a door (including door glazing) shall be tempered safety or laminate safety glass. D. All tinted exterior glazing shall match existing tinted exterior glazing.


2.2 SHEET OR FLOAT GLASS A. Clear sheet or float glass shall be glazed in interior openings not indicated or specified otherwise. Install 3/16” float glass for glazing openings up to and including 36 sq. ft. Install 7/32” glass for the glazing openings over 36 sq. ft. but not over 45 sq. ft. Sheet for float glass shall be one of the following manufacturer’s products: 1. DS Float Glass: PPG Industries, Inc. 2. DS Float Glass: Ford Glass Division 3. DS Float Glass: Guardian Industries 4. DS Float Glass: Oldcastle Glass 2.3 TINTED FLOAT GLASS A. Tinted float glass shall be glazed in all exterior window openings. Glass thickness shall be as outlined in clear float section. 1. Light Transmittance: 58% 2. Shading Coefficient: 0.76 3. U-Value (Summer): 1.08 2.4 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating glass units shall be 1” total thickness and shall be as follows: 1. Exterior glass shall be ¼”, tinted to match existing glazing (tempered as required by code). 2. Space shall be ½”, Low-E coating (3). 3. Interior glass shall be ¼” clear (tempered as required by code). B. Insulating glass at fixed glass windows and glazing shall match existing. All exterior windows shall be tinted and tempered as required by code. C. Insulating glass unit shall be a product of one of the following manufacturers: 1. PPG Industries, Inc. 2. Guardian Industries, Inc. 3. Oldcastle Glass, Inc. 2.5 TEMPERED GLASS: A. Tempered glass shall be fully tempered safety glass manufactured by a special heat treating process to improve its mechanical strength. Glass shall meet the requirements of ANSI Z97.1 and USPC standard 16 CFR 1201 C and C11. Interior glass shall be clear and exterior glass shall be tinted with tongless edges of thickness shall be a minimum of 7/32” or as required by CPSC for openings size. B. Tempered glass shall be products of one of the following manufacturers: 1. Herculite as manufactured by PPG Industries, Inc. 2. Tempered safety glass as manufactured by Ford Glass Division 3. Guardian tempered glass as manufactured by Guardian Industries, Inc. 4. Tempered Safety Glass as manufactured by Oldcastle Glass 2.6 MIRRORS: A. Mirrors shall be ¼” Plate Glass (Tempered). 2.7 SEALING MATERIAL A. Provide neoprene setting materials of the types required for the applicable setting method specified in the FGMA Glazing Sealing Systems Manual, unless specified otherwise herein. Do not use metal sash putty, non-skinning compounds, non-resilient preformed sealers or impregnated preformed gaskets. Materials which will be exposed to view and unpainted shall be gray or neutral color. 2.8 GLAZING TYPE A. Butyl-polyisobutylene preformed sealant complying with AAMA 804.1 for Channel Glazing. 2.9 GLAZING COMPOUND A. Non-hardening, elastic type as recommended by glass manufacturer.


2.10 ELASTOMERIC SEALANT A. Shall be recommended by sealant manufacturer for glazing applications of project. Sealant shall be chemically compatible with setting blocks, edge blocks, sealing tapes and with sealants used in manufacture of insulating glass units. 2.11 PREFORMED CHANNELS A. Neoprene, vinyl or rubber, NAAMM SG-1, as recommended by the glass manufacturer for the particular condition. 2.12 SEALING TAPES A. Preformed, semi-solid, polymeric based material of proper size and compressibility for the particular condition. Use only where glazing rabbet is designed for tape and tape is recommended by the glass or sealant manufacturer. Provide spacer shims for use with compressible tapes. 2.13 SETTING BLOCKS AND EDGE BLOCKS A. Lead or neoprene of 70 to 90 Shore durometer hardness, chemically compatible with sealants used and of sizes recommended by the glass manufacturer. 2.14 ACCESSORIES A. As required by manufacturer to provide a complete installation, including glazing points, clips, shims, angles, beads and spacer strips. Provide non-corroding metal accessories. Provide primer sealers and cleaners as recommended by the glass and sealant manufacturers. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PRECAUTIONS AND PROCEDURES A. Determine the sizes to provide the required edge clearances by field measuring the actual openings to receive the glass. Grind smooth all edges of glass that will be exposed in finish work. Leave labels in place until the installation is approved, except remove applied labels on insulating glass units as soon as glass is installed. Securely fix moveable items or keep in a closed and locked position until glazing compound has thoroughly set. 3.2 GLASS SETTING A. Items to be glazed shall be either shop or field glazed using glass of the quality and thickness specified or indicated. Preparation and glazing, unless otherwise specified or approved, shall conform to all applicable recommendations in the FGMA Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual. Aluminum windows, wood doors and wood windows may be glazed in conformance with one of the glazing methods described in the standards under which they are produced, except that face puttying with no bedding will not be permitted. Handle and install glazing materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Use beads or stops which are furnished with the items to be glazed to secure the glass in place. 3.3 EDGE CLEARANCE, FACE CLEARANCE AND BITE A. The glazing system must provide adequate edge and face clearance to properly cushion the glass, thermally and mechanically isolate the glass from the framing members and prevent glass to metal contact. 3.4 WEEP SYSTEMS A. The glazing system must ne installed to prevent accumulation of moisture in glazing channels for prolonged periods. Weep holes shall be provided to ensure adequate drainage. 3.5 FLOAT GLASS A. Cut and set with any visible lines or waves horizontal.


3.6 CLEANING A. Thoroughly clean glass and remove labels, paint spots, putty and other defacement. Glass shall be clean at the time the Work is accepted.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 09 21 16 – GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 21 16-1

SECTION 09 21 16

GYPSUM WALLBOARD (DRYWALL) PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. The listing herein of article or material, operation or method requires that the Contractor shall furnish and install each item listed, of quality, or subject to qualification, noted: according to conditions stated providing therefore all necessary labor, equipment, and incidentals, including: 1. Gypsum Wallboard 2. Metal trim features, including corner treatment 3. Metal wall and ceiling framing systems 4. Joint reinforcement and treatment 5. Fasteners 6. Clean-up

1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:

1. Gypsum Wallboard 2. Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction 3. Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board to Light-Gauge Steel Studs 4. Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board 5. Surface Burning Characteristics of Gypsum Board

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Publication:

1. Fire Resistance Directory, 1980 Edition.

D. Commercial Publication: 1. United States Gypsum Company Publications SA-923, SA-932

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 32 19 – Submittals for requirements, if any. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A. Gypsum wallboard shall be manufactured from asbestos-free materials. Gypsum wallboard shall be as follows: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36

a. Regular: m 48” wide, 5/8” thick, tapered edges (unless noted otherwise on drawings) b. Type X Special Fire-Resistant: 48” wide, 5/8” thick, tapered edges (rated assemblies) c. Cement Backer Board (CB): 48” wide, 1/2” thick, tapered edges (Provide in all toilet rooms shown to be finished with tile on cement backer board).

2.2 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIAL: ASTM C475

A. Taping or Embedding Compound: Specifically formulated and manufactured for use in embedding tape at gypsum board joints and completely compatible with tape and substrate.

B. Finishing or Topping Compound: Specifically formulated and manufactured for use as a finishing

compound.

C. All-Purpose Compound: Specifically formulated and manufactured to serve as both a taping and a finishing compound and compatible with tape and substrate.

D. Joint Tape: Perforated cross-laminated, tapered edge, reinforced paper, or special tape

recommended by the manufacturer.


E. Screws: ASTM C546, Type “S” or Type “W” steel, self-drilling and self-tapping screws.

F. Adhesives: Adhesive containing benzene, carbon tetrachloride, and trichloroethylene shall not be used.

G. Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Board to Metal Framing: Type as recommended by the gypsum

board manufacturer and approved.

H. Corner Bead and Edge Trim: Fabricate from protective-coated steel or plastic designed for its intended use. Flanges shall be free of dirt, grease and other materials that may adversely affect the bond of joint treatment. Materials shall be prefinished or decorated.

I. Water: Clean, fresh and potable.

2.3 WALL/PARTITION SUPPORTS MATERIALS:

A. Studs: 25 gauge (except noted otherwise on the drawings) screw-type “Cee” shaped studs of the depth indicated on the drawings, zinc-coated steel; comply with ASTM C645. Provide 20 gauge studs at following locations: 1. Interior door jambs in 25 gauge stud walls. 2. Studs higher than 13’-6” and where wall hung cabinets or other wall mounted equipment is to be installed. 3. At structural exterior skin locations. 4. See drawing for stud gauge for structural bearing walls.

B. Depth of Section: 3-5/8”, except as otherwise indicated on the drawings.

C. Runners: Match studs; type recommended by stud manufacturer for floor and ceiling support of

studs, and for vertical abutment of drywall at other work.

D. Stiffeners: 3/4” rolled steel channels at 0.3 lb. per ft. , rust-inhibitive paint finish.

E. Stud System Accessories: Provide stud manufacturer’s standard clips, shoes, ties, reinforcements, fasteners, and other accessories as needed for a complete stud system.

F. Resilient furring channels shall be similar and equal to USG RC-1 resilient channels faced with sound

absorbent acoustical tape. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s direction. 2.4 CEILING SUPPORT/FRAMING MATERIALS A. Support/framing for suspended gypsum wallboard ceilings shall consist of 1-1/2” galvanized steel main runner channels and hat shaped galvanized steel furring channels. 2.5 HANGERS, TIE WIRES AND CLIPS

A. Hangers supporting main runner channels shall be soft steel wire not less than 0.1620” nominal diameter (8 gauge) conforming to Federal Specification QQ-W-461, AISI No. 1010, Class 2 zinc coating. Flat steel hangers, 1” by 3/16”, with zinc coating, may be substituted for the wire hangers.

B. Tie wires for splicing furring channels or securing furring to main runner channels shall be galvanized

steel of not less than 0.0915” nominal diameter (13 gauge). Tie wires for splicing hat- shaped furring channels to main runner channels or to structural members shall be galvanized steel of not less than 0.0625” nominal diameter (16 gauge).

C. Clips used in lieu of wire shall be galvanized steel equivalent in holding power to that provided by tie

wires for the specific application.

D. Metal trim features for wallboard shall be formed from zinc-coated steel not lighter than 0.0217: nominal thickness (25 gauge) and shall conform to Federal Specification QQ-S-775, Type I, Class D or E. Metal trim shall be in the following shapes and sizes:

E. Casing beads shall be channel shaped with a concealed wing not less than 7/8” wide and an exposed

wing. Exposed wing may be covered with paper cemented to metal and shall be suitable for joint treatment.


F. Corner beads for use at perimeter of ceilings shall be angle-shaped with wings not less than ¾” wide. Concealed wing shall be perforated for nailing and exposed wing edge folded flat. Exposed wing may be factory finished in a white color.

2.6 GYPSUM WALLBOARD/ASSEMBLY FASTENERS:

A. Bolts shall conform to Federal Specification FF-B-575.

B. Expansion shields shall conform to Federal Specification FF-S-325, Group I, II, or III, of the type and class applicable.

C. Metal screws shall be not less than 1” long with self-tapping threads and self-drilling points.

D. Toggle bolts shall conform to Federal Specification FF-B-588, type and class best suited for the

purpose.

E. Approved manufacturers of gypsum drywall products subject to compliance with the drawings and this section are as follows: 1. Gypsum Board and Related Products:

a. United States Gypsum Company b. Flintkote Products, Genstar Building Materials Company c. Georgia Pacific Company d. Gold Bond Building Products Division, National Gypsum Company.

2. Metal Support Materials: a. United States Gypsum Company b. Gold Bond Building Products Division, National Gypsum Company c. Milcor Division, Inryco, Inc.

3. Direct Suspension Systems: a. Chicago Metallic Corporation b. Donn Corporation c. National Rolling Mills Company d. United States Gypsum Company

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Wallboard delivered prior to use shall be stored within a completely enclosed structure or off the ground and completely enclosed within a weather tight covering. Wallboard shall be dry, free of warpage, and with bundling tape intact immediately prior to use. Application shall commence only after the structure is completely weather tight.

3.2 CEILING FRAMED SYSTEMS

A. Framing for furred ceilings shall be installed at the locations indicated and shall conform to the following:

1. Suspended Ceilings: For spans up to and including 4’ on centers: Ceiling framing shall consist of 1-1/2” steel main runner channels suspended plumb from structural slab or frame by hanger wires or straps spaced at not more than 4’ on centers. Hanger wires shall be wrapped around power driven inserts installed in the supporting precast concrete slab. Hanger wires shall be looped around steel supports and shall receive three full turns around itself. Hanger strap shall be looped around structural framing and connected to itself with 3/8” galvanized bolts and nuts. Hanger wire shall be saddle-tied to main runner channels and shall receive three full turns around itself. Hanger strap shall be looped under main runner channels to form stirrups and through-bolted shall be located within 6” of parallel walls and shall be cut short of abutting walls ½” plus or minus ¼”. Where channels are spliced, the ends shall be overlapped not less than 12” with flanges of channels interlocked and securely tied near each end of the splice with two loops of 16 gauge tie wire. Splices shall be staggered.

3.3 FURRING

A. Hat-shaped steel channels or steel studs shall be provided where steel furring is indicated for screw attachment of gypsum wallboard.


B. For Spans Up To and Including 4’ On Centers: Hat-shaped furring members shall be spaced 16” on centers and securely attached across suspended main runner channels with wire clips or double strand of 16 gauge tie-wire saddle-tied at each crossing. Ends of wire ties shall receive three full twists. Furring shall be spliced with 8” nested laps securely tied near each end of lap with two loops of 16 gauge tie-wire. Splices shall be staggered. Furring wall channels shall be located within 2” of walls. Where wallboard abuts dissimilar wall materials, perimeter of ceilings shall be finished with an edge bead trim strip applied to wall and accurately aligned with the finished ceiling.

3.4 WALL/PARTITION SUPPORT SYSTEM:

A. Install supplementary framing, in accordance with ASTM C754. Provide blocking and bracing to support fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings and similar work which cannot be adequately supported on gypsum board alone. Blocking for TV brackets, grab bars, or other equipment shall support a minimum weight of 200 lb.

B. Isolate stud system from transfer of structural loading to system, both horizontally and vertically.

Provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.

C. Anchor ends of horizontal stiffeners where system abuts structural columns or walls.

D. Install runner tracks at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other work, except as otherwise indicated.

E. Space studs 16” o.c., except as otherwise indicated.

F. Fasten studs at ends of floor and ceiling runner tracks by installing a screw into both flanges at each

end.

G. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system; space 4’-0” o.c. vertically; wire-tie at each intersection.

H. Secure jamb studs to frames of openings with screws, wire-ties or welds, either directly to frames or to special frame-support brackets; and install runner track sections (for jack studs) above and below openings, secured to jamb studs.

I. Space jack studs same as partition studs, and screw to runner tracks above and below.

J. Install 2 studs at each jamb of each opening and one additional stud not more than 6” from jamb

studs. K. Install horizontal stiffeners 6” above and 6” below each opening more than 3’-0” wide, and extend 2

regular stud spaces beyond each jamb.

L. Wall furring shall be "2" members. Space furring members 24” o.c. except as otherwise indicated. M. Install extra furring members and angle runners at terminations of drywall work, and at openings and where required for support of other work occurring in the drywall work.

3.5 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD

A. Apply gypsum board to framing and furring members in accordance with ASTM C840 and the requirements specified herein. Apply gypsum board with separate boards in moderate contact; do not force in place. Stagger end joints of adjoining boards. Neatly fit abutting end and edge joints. Use gypsum board of maximum practical length. Cut out gypsum board as required to make neat close joints around openings. In vertical application of gypsum board, panels shall be of length required to reach full height of vertical surfaces in one continuous piece. Surfaces of gypsum board and substrate members may be adhered together with an adhesive, except where prohibited by fire rating(s). Leave a space approximately ¼” at the bottom of gypsum board for caulking. Type of gypsum board for use in each system specified herein shall be as indicated. Screw spacing shall not exceed 8”.

B. Erection Tolerances: Wall surfaces shall have square corners, be plumb and true, with variations not

exceeding 1/8’ in 8’ from required plane.

C. Control Joints: Install expansion and contraction joints in ceilings and walls in accordance with ASTM C 840, System XIII, unless indicated otherwise. See reflected ceiling plan.


3.6 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD

A. Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840. Provide joint, fastener depression, and corner treatment. Gypsum board finishing shall be Level 4 and match existing texture.

B. Caulking: Caulk openings around pipes, fixtures and other items projecting through gypsum board

as specified in SECTION 07900 – JOINT SEALANTS. Apply caulking material with exposed surface flush with gypsum board.

3.7 FIRE-RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES

A. Wherever fire-rated gypsum board construction is indicated, provide all materials and application methods, including types and spacing of fasteners, in accordance with the specifications contained in the UL Fire Resistance Directory for the Design Number(s) indicated.

3.8 PATCHING

A. Correct surface defects and damage as required to leave gypsum board smooth, uniform appearance, and ready to receive finish as specified.

3.9 CLEAN UP

A. Clean up all debris caused by the work of this Section.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 09 30 00 – CERAMIC TILE 09 30 00-1

SECTION 09 30 00

CERAMIC TILE

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 STANDARDS AND GUIDELINES A. ANSI Tile Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 Standard Specification for Ceramic Tile and ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards included under “American National Standard Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tile". B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated. C. Submittals: With manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for tile work, submit samples of each type, color, and texture of tile. 1. Provide manufacturer’s Master Grade Certificate. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS A. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: For tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns and other appearance characteristics, comply with the following requirements: 1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns for type of products indicated. B. Sizes and Thicknesses: As indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard sizes and thicknesses. C. Tile Grade: "Standard Grade” unless otherwise indicated. D. Interior Floor Tile: 1. Manufacturer: Marazzi, USA 2. Product: Walnut Canyon, color body porcelain 3. Thickness: .335” 4. Size: 13”x13” 5. Color: Umber E. Interior Wall and Base (Trim) at Ceramic Floor Tile: 1. Manufacturer: Marazzi, USA 2. Product: Walnut Canyon, color body porcelain 3. Thickness: .335” 4. Size: 6.5” x 6.5” 5. Level wall tile so top edge is straight and level. Cap unfinished exposed edge of trim and wall tile with Schuter Scheine anodized aluminum trim in width appropriate for tile thickness. 6. Base Color: Umber 7. Wall Color: Umber & Golden (See Interior Elevations) F. Marble Thresholds: Group "A"; ASTM C 503, for exterior use with minimum hardness of 10.0 per ASTM C 241; gray with honed finish unless otherwise indicated. G. Setting Materials: Provide setting materials as follows: 1. Portland Cement Mortar: Materials complying with ANSI A 108.1 and as follows: a. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's Standard 2. Dry-set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1 3. Latex Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4. H. Grouting Materials: 1. Latex Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6 of the following composition: a. Prepackaged dry grout mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate, and the following dry polymer additive in the form of a re-emuslifiable powder to which only water is added at job site. 1) Dry Polymer Additive: Polyvinyl acetate or ethylene vinyl acetate.


b. Latex additive (water emulsion) replacing part or all of gauging water, added at job site with dry grout mixture, with type of latex and dry grout mix as follows: 1) Latex Type: Manufacturer's Standard. I. Elastomeric Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with the requirements of Division 7 section “Joint Sealant”, including ASTM C920 as referenced by Type, Grade, Class and Uses. J. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide the following materials: 1. One-Part Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealants: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O (for use in joints in non-traffic areas). 2. Temporary Protective Coating: As follows, formulated to protect the exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout, compatible with tile and mortar/grout products, and easily removable without damaging grout or tile. a. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined, tasteless, odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil, with a melting point of 120° F (49° C) to 140° F (60° C) per ASTM D 87. b. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as a temporary protective coating for tile. K. Cement Backer Board: Equal to 1/2” “Wonderboard” backer board. L. Accessories: Schuter Scheine anodized aluminum tile trim. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Do not start tile work until roughing in for plumbing, heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and electrical work has been completed. Floor surfaces to receive thin set ceramic tile shall not vary by more than 1/8” in 10’ for the required plane and slope. Wall surfaces receiving ceramic tile shall have square corners, be plumb and true, with variations not exceeding 1/8” in 8’ from the required plane. B. Preparation of Structural Floor Slabs: Prepare slab in accordance with ANSI requirements. Prepare existing tile floor by cleaning and grinding to create an acceptable surface to install thin-set tile. Before tile is applied the existing concrete floor shall be tested for levelness or uniformity of slope by using straight edges. Area where the floor does not meet the required tolerances shall be filled and leveled in accordance with ANSI A 108.5. C. Floor and Wall Tile in Dry-Set Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Install floor and wall tile in accordance with ANSI A 108.5 where slab is not recessed and tile is scheduled. Masonry walls to receive a leveling coat of mortar prior to the application of wall tile. D. Joints: Make parallel, plumb, level, and in alignment. Make end joints in broken-joint work, as far as practicable, on center lines of adjoining tiles. Set square tiles with straight joints, and set oblong tiles with broken joints, except in special arrangements and design, as indicated or specified. Match wall tile joints to align with floor tile joints. E. Joint Width: Make joints uniform in width and space to accommodate tile in given spaces with a minimum of cutting, except maintain standard mounting widths between abutting sheets of mounted ceramic mosaic tile. Make joint widths as follows: 1. Mounted Tile: As determined by the mounted tile spacing. 2. Un-mounted Glazed Wall Tile: As determined by spacing lugs. 3. Trim Units and Accessories: Match that of adjoining tile units. F. Grouting and Pointing: Dry-set grout may be applied over dry tile without wetting of tile. Factory premixed colored epoxy grouts may be used. Color shall be as indicated. G. Grout glazed wall tile in accordance with ANSI A 108.1 or A 108.5. H. Grout ceramic mosaic tile in accordance with ANSI A 108.1. I. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide expansion and control joints in tile work in accordance with ANSI A 108.1 or A 108.5 and where indicated.


3.2 CURING AND CLEANING A. Curing: Cover floors with waterproof paper with joints lapped at least 4” and the laps tape-sealed or held down with planks or other weights. Allow to damp cure for at least 72 hours before permitting foot traffic on tiled floor. Cure in accordance with ANSI A 108.1 or A 108.5. B. Cleaning: Clean in accordance with ANSI A 108.1 or A 108.5, except acid cleaning of unglazed tile, when necessary, shall be done no sooner than 14 days after setting tile. C. Seal floor and tile joints in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Meet the requirements of ANSI A 108.1 or A 108.5; cover finished tile floors with clean building paper before permitting foot traffic on them. Place board walkways on floors that are to be continuously used as passageways by workmen. Cover window stools and thresholds with boards. Protect tiled vertical outside corners (external angles) with board corner strips in areas used as passageways by workmen.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 09 51 13 – ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 13-1

SECTION 09 51 13

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of acoustical ceilings complete in areas of building where scheduled on the Drawings. 1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The following publications of the issues listed below, but references thereafter by basic designation only, form a part of the Specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto. 1. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): a. Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile Lay-In Panel Ceilings b. Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems (1981) for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels. c. Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials d. C-423-81a Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. e. Latex Ceiling Compounds (R 1981) f. Fire Test of Building Construction Materials g. Determination of Sound Transmission Class 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 32 19 – Submittals PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Ceiling Sound Absorption: The Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C-423 Method of Test. 2.2 CEILING MATERIALS A. Ceiling Tile Units AT-1: Existing ceiling system to be carefully removed for renovation work and reinstalled. Provide any additional ceiling tiles and ceiling support system and ceiling tiles as required. Match existing. B. Ceiling Tile Units AT-2 Typical: 24” x 24” x ½”, vinyl faced MR, gypsum wallboard ceiling panels. Grid tee shall be aluminum faced. C. Finish shall be factory applied white vinyl latex paint. Size and pattern shall be as follows: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units AT-3 Typical 24” x 24” x ¾”, non directional, all purpose ceiling pattern, tegular, lay in panels, product of one of the following manufacturers: a. USG Radar Clima-Plus High NRC (#22121) b. Armstrong Fine Fissured High NRC (#1820) c. Celotex Fine Fissured High NRC (#HHF-454-DP) 2.3 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM: ASTM C635 and the following requirements: A. Exposed grid, direct hung, concealed, upward access B. Finish: Surfaces exposed to view shall be of uniform width (15/16”) and shall be aluminum or steel with factory applied white baked enamel finish. Zinc coated steel shall receive a phosphate treatment prior to painting. C. Accessories: Provide Manufacturer’s standard wall or edge moldings.


D. Accessibility: Provide access panels in locations indicated on the Drawings. Access panels shall match adjacent acoustical units in appearance. Equip the panels with suitable framing or fastening devices designed to permit removal or replacement without damage to the units or supporting system. Access panels shall not be less than 24” x 24”, no more than 24” x 48” in size. 2.4 HANGERS A. Wires: ASTM A 641-81. Soft annealed, light zinc coated carbon steel wire B. Straps: 1” x 1/16” galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 526 with a light commercial zinc coating or ASTM A 366 with an electrodeposited zinc coating conforming to ASTM B 633, Type RS. C. Rods: 3/16” diameter threaded steel rods, zinc or cadmium coated. 2.5 ADHESIVE: ASTM D 1779 A. Acoustical Sealant: Synthetic rubber or polymeric-based materials complying with ASTM C 834. B. Extra Stock: Furnish one spare acoustical unit for each 100 units installed. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver acoustical units in the manufacturer’s original unopened containers with brand name and type clearly marked. Handle materials carefully and store them under cover in dry, water tight enclosures. Immediately before installation, store acoustical units for not less than 24 hours at the same temperature and relative humidity as the space where they will be installed. 3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain a uniform temperature of not less than 60°F nor more than 85°F and a relative humidity of not more than 70% continuously before, during and after installation of acoustical units. Interior finish work, such as, plastering, concrete and terrazzo work shall be completed and dry before installation. Mechanical, electrical and other work above the ceiling line shall be completed and approved prior to the start of acoustical ceiling tile installation. 3.3 CONDITIONS OF SURFACES A. Examine surfaces to receive directly attached acoustical units for unevenness, irregularities and dampness what would affect quality and execution of the work. Areas to which acoustical units will be cemented shall be free of oils, residue, or any other materials that reduce bonding capabilities of the adhesive. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Suspended Ceilings: Install the suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 635 and ASTM C 636 and the following additional requirements: B. Hangers: Space hangers 4’ on center each direction. Hangers shall be laid out for each individual room or space. Install additional hangers where required to support framing around beams, ducts, columns, grilles, light fixtures and other penetrations through the ceiling. C. Caulking: Seal all joints around pipes, ducts or electrical outlets penetrating the ceiling. Apply a continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant on vertical web of wall or edge moldings. D. Suspension Members: Keep main runners and carrying channels clear of abutting walls and partitions. Provide at least two main runners for each ceiling span. E. Directly attach hanger wires to overhead structure. Where structural members do not occur at required maximum hanger location, provide 1 ½” C.R. steel channels intermediate support between structural members.


F. Provide metal edge molding at perimeter of each room, space or panel and at adjacent vertical surfaces. Edge molding shall be steel with baked enamel finish. Molding shall be installed to level horizontal line, except in those areas indicated on the Drawings to have sloped ceilings. G. Erect acoustical units with joints close, straight and true to line and with exposed surfaces level and flush at joints. Make corners and arises full and without worn or broken places. Join units neatly to connecting work. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids or other defects in painted surfaces. Remove damaged or improperly installed units and install new materials.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 09 65 00 – LUXURY VINYL MODULAR FLOORING 09 65 00-1

SECTION 09 65 00

LUXURY VINYL MODULAR FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flooring and accessories as shown on the drawings and schedules and as indicated by the requirements of this section. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract (including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 sections) apply to the work of this section. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 3 Concrete; not the work of this section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Select an installer who is competent in the installation of luxury vinyl modular flooring.

B. If required, provide types of flooring and accessories supplied by one manufacturer, including leveling and patching compounds, and adhesives.

C. If required, provide flooring material to meet the following fire test performance criteria as tested by

a recognized independent testing laboratory: 1. ASTM F 1700 – Class III, Type A and B 2. Static coefficient of friction: ASTM D 204 greater than 1 3. Static Load Limit: ASTM F 970 – Passes 4. Fire Performance: Flooring Radiant Panel: ASTM E 648 Class 1 5. Smoke Density: ASTM E 662 6. Chemical Resistance: ASTM F 925 7. Wear Layer Thickness: .020” (0.51 mm) 8. Overall Thickness: ASTM F 386 .125”

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings, seaming plan, coving details, and manufacturer's technical data, installation and maintenance instructions for flooring and accessories.

B. Submit the manufacturer's standard samples showing the required complete line of colors and

sizes for flooring and applicable accessories. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Deliver materials in good condition to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original unopened containers that bear the name and brand of the manufacturer, project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.

B. Store materials in a clean, dry, enclosed space off the ground, and protected from the weather

and from extremes of heat and cold. Protect adhesives from freezing. Store flooring, adhesives and accessories in the spaces where they will be installed for at least 24 hours before beginning installation.

C. Maintain a minimum temperature in the spaces to receive the flooring and accessories of 68ºF and a

maximum temperature of 85ºF for at least 24 hours before, during, and for not less than 24 hours after installation. Thereafter, maintain a minimum temperature of 68ºF in areas where work is completed. Protect all materials from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators, or other heating fixtures and appliances.


D. Install flooring and accessories after the other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Close spaces to traffic during the installation of the flooring. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until they are sufficiently dry to achieve a bond with the adhesive, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture tests.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUXURY VINYL TILE MATERIALS

A. Provide Responsive Luxury Vinyl Tile and Luxury Vinyl Plank floor covering, multi-layer vinyl product with rotogravure photo layer between solid vinyl backing and clear vinyl wear layer.

1. Tile (18 x 18 inches): as indicated on Architect’s Finish Floor Plan 2. Plank (6” wide x 36” long installed with random length placement): as indicated on Architect’s

Floor Finish Plan 3. Similar and equal luxury vinyl flooring products must be presented and approved by the

Architect of Record a minimum of 7 days prior to bidding for design and color and must produce maintenance instructions and warranty publishing a damp mop maintenance recommendation.

4. Products which have not been approved by the Architect of Record will not be accepted.

2.2 WALL BASE MATERIALS

A. Provide 1/8 in. thick, 4 in. high Johnsonite Wall Base with a matte finish, conforming to ASTM F1861, Type CB vinyl, coved (toe) profile.

2.3 ADHESIVES A. Provide Respond 9000 for general field tile areas. For field tile areas exposed to topical water, heavy rolling loads, and under Hill-Rom hospital beds, provide Respond 9200 two-part epoxy adhesive. B. Provide Johnsonite 960 Acrylic Cove Base Adhesive for vinyl wall base at porous surface installation and Johnsonite 946 Contact Bond Adhesive for non-porous surface installation. 2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide transition/reducing strips tapered to meet abutting materials.

B. Provide threshold of thickness and width as shown on the drawings or as required.

C. Provide resilient edge strips of width shown on the drawings or as required, of equal gauge to the flooring, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, with color to match or contrast with the flooring, or as selected by the Architect from standard colors available.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, and other defects that might prevent adhesive bond or impair durability or appearance of the flooring material.

B. Inspect subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are free from curing, sealing,

parting and hardening compounds; residual adhesives; adhesive removers; and other foreign materials that might prevent adhesive bond. Visually inspect for evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, dusting, mold, or mildew.

C. Concrete shall be prepared using ASTM F710, Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and other

Monolithic Floors to receive resilient flooring.

D. Floor covering shall not be installed over expansion joints.

E. Report conditions contrary to contract requirements that would prevent a proper installation. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


F. Failure to call attention to defects or imperfections will be construed as acceptance and approval of the subfloor. Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions existing at the time of installation.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Smooth concrete surfaces, removing rough areas, projections, previous floor adhesives, ridges, and bumps, and filling low spots, control or construction joints, and other defects as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.

B. Remove paint, varnish, oils, release agents, sealers, and waxes. Remove residual adhesives as

recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove curing and hardening compounds not compatible with the adhesives used, as indicated by a bond test or by the compound manufacturer's recommendations for flooring. Avoid organic solvents.

C. It is essential that moisture tests be taken on all concrete floors regardless of age and grade level.

One test should be conducted for every 1,000sf in accordance with ASTM F2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs using in situ probes with a maximum relative humidity of 75% . If the test results exceed the limitations, the installation must not proceed until the problem has been corrected.

D. Conduct an adhesive bond test.

E. Vacuum or broom-clean surfaces to be covered immediately before the application of flooring.

Make subfloor free from dust, dirt, grease, and all foreign materials.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF LUXURY VINYL FLOORING

A. Review tile labels to be sure all tiles are of the same batch/shade.

B. Install Stone Collection 18 x 18 inch tiles with arrows all running the same direction. Install 6” planks all running as shown on floor covering layout.

C. Install flooring wall to wall before the installation of floor-set cabinets, casework, furniture,

equipment, movable partitions, etc. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door recesses, closets, and similar openings as shown on the drawings.

D. If required, install flooring on pan-type floor access covers. Maintain continuity of color and

pattern within pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Adhere flooring to the subfloor around covers and to covers.

E. Scribe, cut, and fit or flash cove to permanent fixtures, columns, walls, partitions, pipes, outlets, and

built-in furniture and cabinets.

F. Adhere flooring to the subfloor without cracks, voids, raising and puckering at the seams. Roll with a 100-150 pound (45.36 kilogram) roller in the field areas. Hand-roll flooring at the perimeter and the seams to assure adhesion. Refer to specific rolling instructions of the flooring manufacturer.

G. Install flooring with adhesives, tools, and procedures in strict accordance with the manufacturer's

written instructions. Observe the recommended adhesive trowel notching, open times, and working times. Provide required divider strips (1” wide) under doors where floor material or direction changes.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES

A. Apply top set wall base to walls, columns, casework, and other permanent fixtures in areas where top-set base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practical, with inside corners fabricated from base materials that are mitered or coped. Tightly bond base to vertical substrate with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.

B. Fill voids with plastic filler along the top edge of the resilient wall base or integral cove cap on

masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates.


C. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring, and secure with adhesive recommended by the edge strip manufacturer. Install edge strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed. Install edge strips centered under doors as required where one type of flooring is adjacent to another flooring type.

D. Caulk space between LVT flooring and door frames. Caulk shall match flooring color.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Light foot traffic may be allowed 24 hours after installation.

B. No heavy traffic, rolling loads, or furniture placement for 72 hours after installation.

C. Allow at least 72 hours for adhesive to achieve bond before commencing recommended maintenance routine.

D. Do not use acetone or similar materials to clean floors. E. Refer to Responsive Vinyl Flooring’s Maintenance Instructions for complete maintenance details.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 09 91 00 – PAINTING 09 91 00-1

SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior and exterior surfaces as follows:

1. Complete prep and painting of surfaces is required whether indicated on the drawings, scheduled, or specified herein. The intent is to provide coatings on all new and existing or newly revealed surfaces exposed to view, except factory-finished or integrally colored surfaces. 2. Complete painting is required behind all equipment or fixtures, whether exposed to view or not, as a function of providing a portion of the weather-resistant coating. This may necessitate removal and reinstallation of the equipment or fixtures as required to provide weather resistant coating. The Contractor, in his capacity as coordinator of the work, shall determine who shall remove and reinstall the equipment, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Specific items intended to be left unfinished or specifically noted to have another finish applied are to be protected from these finishing operations and to be under other sections of these specifications. 4. Examine specifications and drawings for various other trade requirements for items that require painting. Become familiar with their provisions regarding painting. Paint or finish surfaces that are left unfinished by requirements of other specification sections including piping, conduit, etc., in exposed-to-view conditions. 5. All switch plates, cover plates, device cover plates, fixtures, grilles, or any other type of similar materials applied to the wall shall be removed prior to painting. The devices shall be reinstalled after the coating processes have been completed. Electrical and Mechanical fixtures shall, at a minimum, have prime and one finish coat applied to mounting surfaces prior to installation of fixtures. 6. All hardware that is applied or attached to any doors or other materials or equipment that are to be painted shall have all hardware removed prior to painting or coating processes, unless those hardware pieces are specifically noted to be painted. If the Contractor is unsure of the requirements for painting or coatings to be applied, he shall request, in writing, the Owner’s or Architect’s requirements. Failure to adhere to these procedures will result in the Contractor removing and cleaning or replacing all items of field painted hardware. 7. Furnish all tools, ladders, scaffolding, and any other equipment necessary for completion of the work.

B. This section does not include: 1. Painting specified under other sections. 2. Painting of metal surfaces that are pre-finished and are intended to remain as factory finished and all plated metals intended to remain unfinished, except where specifically required herein or as noted on the drawings. 3. Painting of any moving parts of operating units, hinges, valves, operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor shafts, etc., unless specifically noted otherwise. 4. Painting over labels or equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates. 5. Painting of any pre-finished wall plates or outlet covers unless specifically noted to match interior or exterior color schemes. C. This section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following substrates: 1. Concrete 2. Concrete masonry units (CMU) 3. Steel (including all exposed-to-view steel framing) 4. Galvanized metal (including all exposed-to-view metal deck and steel roof framing) 5. Wood 6. Gypsum Board


7. Stucco, cement plaster 8. Door frames and exterior hollow metal doors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each sample. 4. Label each sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current Master Painters Institute “MPI Approved Products List” for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.


A. MPI Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPUI standards indicated and listed in “MPI Approved Products List.” 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in “MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual” for products and paint systems indicated. B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. c. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply each benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 3. Final approval of color selection will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply up to four (4) additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. C. Qualifications of Workmen: 1. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during the execution of the work of this Section, who shall be thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements and the materials and methods needed for their execution, and who shall direct all work performed under them. 2. Provide adequate numbers of workmen skilled in the necessary crafts and informed of the methods and materials to be used. 3. In acceptance or rejection of the work of this Section, the Architect will make no exception for the lack of skill on the part of the workmen.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated area with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45º F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50ºF and 95ºF.


B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85%; at temperatures less than 5ºF (3ºC) above dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (bath mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5%, but not less than 1 gallon of each material and color applied.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Sherwinn-Williams Company (basis of design and paint systems) 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. ICI Paints 4. Porter Paints 5. PPG Architectural Finishes 6. Ospho by The Skybryte Co.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12% 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12% 3. Wood: 15% 4. Plaster: 12% 5. Gypsum Board: 12% C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor’s acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations in “MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual” applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.


1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection, if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulates. 1. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer’s written instructions. E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer’s written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation. I. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. J. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. K. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry. L. Synthetic Wood and Fiber Reinforced Plastic Substrates: 1. Prepare surfaces and paint materials as recommended by the molding manufacturer. If moldings get dirty during installation, clean with a light detergent and warm water. For stubborn stains use denatured alcohol or one part bleach to five parts water. 2. Correct dents and gouges before applying primer. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides and backsides. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.


E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: See mechanical and electrical specification sections for specific and additional painting and coating requirements. Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical Work: a. Un-insulated metal piping b. Un-insulated plastic piping c. Pipe hangers and supports d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets f. Duct, equipment and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 2. Electrical Work a. Switchgear that does not have factory-applied final finishes b. Panel boards that do not have factory-applied final finishes c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have factory-primed finish for field painting d. Plywood terminal boards, where required, shall be finished with two coats of fire resistant paint. Color as selected by Architect.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing and refinishing as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. The systems listed below shall be used in all areas where applicable. Not all systems will be used. B. Concrete Substrates, Non-traffic Surfaces: 1. Latex Over Sealer System: MPI INT 3.1A a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer (SW B28W400) b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat (SW B20W2251) c. Topcoat: Interior latex (eggshell) (SW B20W2251) C. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler (SW B51W20) b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat (SWB20W2251) c. Topcoat: Interior latex (eggshell) (SW B20W2251) D. Steel Substrates 1. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E (for exposed to view metal deck and steel roof framing) a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (semi-gloss) E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates 1. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E (for exposed to view metal deck and steel roof/floor structural framing) a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anti-corrosive metal primer b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (semi-gloss) 2. Water-Based Dry-Fall System: MPI INT 5.1C


a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anti-corrosive metal primer (SW B50Z series) b. Topcoat: Waterborne dry fall (SW B42W1) 3. Restoration of light gauge metal framing shall include the following: a. Remove loose rust from light gauge metal framing members and coat metal areas with “Ospho” rust-inhibiting coating. Let dry for 24 hours. Follow manufacturer’s instructions. b. Prime coat: Kem Kromick Universal Metal Primer. B50AZ6 F. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork or wood doors 1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.3T a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer (SW B51W20) b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat (SW B31-2200 Series) c. Topcoat: Interior latex (semi-gloss) (SW B31-2200 Series) G. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer (SW B28W400) b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat (SW B20-2200 Series) c. Topcoat: Interior latex (eggshell) (SW B20-2200 Series) H. Plaster Substrates 1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer (SW B28W400) b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat (SW B20-2200 Series) c. Topcoat: Interior latex (eggshell) (SW B20-2200 Series) I. Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint systems over new, interior wood surfaces: 1. Semi-Gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats. a. First and Second Coats: Semi-gloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Devoe: 39XX Wonder-Tones Semi-Gloss Interior Latex Enamel 2) S-W: 3) Moore: Moore’s Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex Enamel #333 J. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new and existing interior woodwork. 1. Waterborne, Satin Varnish Finish: 2 Finish coats of a waterborne, clear satin varnish over a sealer coat and a waterborne, interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Paste wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) Devoe: None Required 2) Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler #238 b. Stain Coat: Waterborne, interior wood stain applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1) Devoe: 41XX WoodWorks Waterborne Interior Stain 2) Moore: Benwood Penetrating Stain #234 c. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1) Devoe: 4200 WoodWorks Waterborne Quick-Dry Clear Sealer 2) Moore: None Recommended d. First and Second Finish Coats: Waterborne, varnish finish applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1) Devoe: 4300 WoodWorks Waterborne Crystal Clear Finish, Satin 2) Moore: Stays Clear Polyurethane #423, Satin K. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metals: 1. Semi-Gloss, Acrylic Enamel Finish: One (1) finish coat over an enamel undercoat. a. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semi-gloss, acrylic latex, interior enamel, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 1) Devoe: 39XX WonderTones Semi-Gloss Interior Latex Enamel 2) S-W: 3) Moore: Moore’s Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217


b. Finish Coat: Semi-gloss, acrylic latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 1) Devoe: 39XX WonderTones Semi-Gloss Interior Latex Enamel 2) S-W: 3) Moore: Moore’s Regal AquaGlo Vinyl Acrylic Latex Enamel #333 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. High Build Latex System: MPI EXT 3.1L, applied to dry film thickness of not less than 10 mils. a. Prime Coat: Alkali-resistant primer or as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer (SW A24-300 series) b. Intermediate Coat: High-build latex (exterior) (SW A44W800 series – smooth) c. Topcoat: High build latex (exterior) (SW A44W800 series – smooth) 2. Latex Aggregate System: MPI EXT 3.1N. a. Prime Coat: Alkali-resistant primer or as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer (SW A24-300 series) b. Intermediate Coat: High-build latex (exterior) (SW A44W800 series – smooth) c. Topcoat: High build latex (exterior) (SW A44W800 series – textured) B. CMU Substrates: 1. High Build Latex System: MPI EXT 4.2K, applied to dry film thickness of not less than 10 mils. a. Prime Coat: Alkali-resistant primer or as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer (SW A24-300 series) b. Intermediate Coat: High-build latex (exterior) (SW A44W800 series – smooth) c. Topcoat: High build latex (exterior) (SW A44W800 series – smooth) 2. Latex Aggregate System: MPI EXT 4.2B. a. Prime Coat: Alkali-resistant primer or as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer (SW A24-300 series) b. Intermediate Coat: High-build latex (exterior) (SW A44W800 series – smooth) c. Topcoat: High build latex (exterior) (SW A44W800 series – textured) C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Latex Over Water-Based Primer System: MPI EXT 5.3H. a. Prime Coat: Waterorne galvanized metal primer (SW B66-310 series) b. Intermediate Coat: Waterborne Light Industrial Topcoat (SW B66-200 series) c. Topcoat: Waterborne Light Industrial Topcoat (semi-gloss) (SW B66-200 series).

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 09 97 23 – CONCRETE AND MASONRY COATINGS 09 97 23-1

SECTION 09 97 23

CONCRETE AND MASONRY COATINGS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water-based, 100% acrylic, smooth, easy-cleaning, waterproof coating for exterior, above-grade, vertical surfaces of existing coatings. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 91 00 – Painting 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D 522 / D 522M – Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. B. ASTM D 1475 – Standard Test Method For Density of Liquid Coatings, Inks, and Related Products. C. ASTM D 3359 – Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. D. ASTM D 3719 – Standard Test Method for Quantifying Dirt Collection on Coated Exterior Panels. E. ASTM D 4541 – Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers. F. ASTM D 5201 – Standard Practice for Calculating Formulation Physical Constants of Paints and Coatings. ASTM D 5590 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Resistance of Paint Films and Related Coatings to Fungal Defacement by Accelerated Four-Week Agar Plate Assay. G. ASTM E 96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. H. ASTM G 155 – Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Non-Metallic Materials. I. ICRI 310.2R – Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, Polymer Overlays, and Concrete Repair. J. ISO 9001:2008 – Quality Management Systems – Requirements. K. Miami/Dade TAS 143-95 – Dirt Pickup Resistance. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene pre-application meeting 2 weeks before start of application of touch-up waterproof coating. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including Contractor, Architect, applicator, and manufacturer’s representative. C. Review the Following: 1. Materials. 2. Protection of in-place conditions. 3. Surface preparation. 4. Application. 5. Protection. 6. Coordination with other work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Division 1– General Requirements. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, including surface preparation, mixing, and application instructions.


C. Samples: Submit manufacturer’s complete line of samples of full range of colors of waterproof coating. 1. Sample Size: Minimum 3” by 3”. D. Manufacturer’s Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification that materials comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application. E. Manufacturer’s Project References: Submit manufacturer’s list of successfully completed waterproof coating projects, including project name and location, name of architect, and type and quantity of waterproof coatings furnished. F. Applicator’s Project References: Submit applicator’s list of successfully completed waterproof coating projects, including project name and location, name of architect, and type and quantity of waterproof coatings applied. G. Cleaning Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s cleaning instructions. H. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer regularly engaged, for a minimum of 10 years, in the manufacturing of waterproof coatings of similar type to that specified. 2. ISO 9001:2008 certified. B. Applicator’s Qualifications: 1. Applicator regularly engaged, for a minimum of 5 years, in application of waterproof coatings of similar type to that specified. 2. Employ persons trained for application of waterproof coatings. C. Mock-ups: 1. Apply materials to 4-foot by 4-foot (1.2-m by 1.2-m) mock-up to verify acceptable color, texture, and adhesion. 2. Measure adhesion in accordance with ASTM D 3359, Method A. a. Required Minimum Adhesion Rating, 0 to 5 Scale: 4A. 3. Construct mock-ups using same materials, surface preparation, mixing, and application for use in the Work. 4. Construct mock-ups at locations determined by Architect. 5. Do not proceed until mock-ups are approved by Architect. 6. Retain approved mock-ups. 7. BASF representative to inspect each phase of work associated with applied coating system, including but not limited to, surface preparation, detail work and coating application. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery Requirements: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Keep materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging until installation. 3. Store materials in clean, dry area. 4. Store materials out of direct sunlight. 5. Keep materials from freezing. 6. Protect materials during storage, handling, and application to prevent contamination or damage. 1.8 AMBIENT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when substrate or ambient temperatures are 40°F (4°C) or below during application or within 24 hours after application. B. Do not apply materials when rain, snow, or excessive moisture is expected during application or within 24 hours after application.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: BASF Corporation, 889 Valley Park Drive, Shakopee, Minnesota 55379. Toll Free 800- 433-9517. Website www.master-builders-solutions.basf.us. B. Substitutions: Not permitted. C. Single Source: Provide materials from single manufacturer. 2.2 CONCRETE AND MASONRY COATINGS A. Waterproof Coating: “MasterProtect C 350”. 1. Description: Water-based, 100% acrylic, smooth, easy-cleaning, waterproof coating. 2. Use: Exterior, above-grade, vertical surfaces. 3. Breathable. 4. UV resistant. 5. VOC Content: Less than 50 g/L, less water and exempt solvents. B. Test Data: 1. Density, ASTM D 1475: 11.8 lbs/gal (1.41 kg/L). 2. Solids by Volume, ASTM D 5201: 41%. 3. Adhesion to Concrete, ASTM D 4541, 28 Days: 500 psi. 4. Dirt Pickup Resistance, Miami/Dade TAS 14395, Section 7.8 (Modified): Greater than 90% retention of reflectance. 5. Dirt Collection, ASTM D 3719, 61 Days, 45° Angle, Southern Exposure, Dc Index: 0.98. 6. Artificial Weathering and UV Resistance, ASTM G 155, Xenon Arc, Type B, 2,000 Hours: No deleterious effect. 7. Water-Vapor Permeance, ASTM E 96, Wet Cup Test: 20 perms. 8. Flexibility, ASTM D 522, 7 Wet Mils, ½” Mandrel, 40°F (4°C) and 70°F (21°C): No cracking. 9. Fungus Resistance, ASTM D 5590, 30-Day Exposure: No growth. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Patching Compound: MasterProtect FL 746”, textured 1. Description: 100% acrylic-emulsion patching compound. 2. Use: Crack repair. B. Base Coat: “MasterProtect HB 200”. 1. Description: Water-based, 100% acrylic, smooth, waterproof coating. 2. Use: Base coat for waterproof coating. C. Primer: “MasterProtect P 100”. 1. Description: Acrylic primer. 2. Use: Primer for all chalky surfaces. 2.4 COLORS A. Coating Colors 1. Finish coating colors will be selected by the Architect. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive waterproof coating. B. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect application or subsequent use. C. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.2 PROTECTION OF IN-PLACE CONDITIONS A. Protect adjacent surfaces and landscaping from contact with waterproof coating.

http://www.master-builders-solutions.basf.us/�


3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Ensure surfaces are sound, clean, dry, and free of bond-inhibiting contaminants. C. Ensure concrete substrates are fully cured. D. Repair Materials: Repair holes, spalled areas, and damaged concrete with appropriate repair materials from same manufacturer as waterproof coating. 1. Apply repair materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Ensure repair materials are compatible with waterproof coating. 3. Allow repair materials to fully cure. E. Remove protruding concrete accessories. F. Smooth out surface irregularities. G. Roughen concrete surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to achieve surface profile of CSP 3 in accordance with ICRI 310.2R. H. Use chemical cleaning compounds in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, if necessary to remove stains. I. Crack Repair: 1. Treat cracks larger than 1/32” with patching compound from same manufacturer as waterproof coating. a. Apply patching compound in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. b. Ensure patching compound is compatible with waterproof coating. c. Allow patching compound to fully cure. J. New Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Apply to new concrete masonry units and cement plaster areas a base coat of block filler from same manufacturer as waterproof coating. a. Apply block filler in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. b. Ensure block filler is compatible with waterproof coating. c. Apply block filler to be free of pinholes. d. Allow block filler to fully cure. K. Priming: 1. If applying to bare concrete, prime surface with MasterProtect P 150 prior to coating. 2. Chalky surfaces should be primed with MasterProtect P 100. L. Blending: 1. Color blend coating on the repaired and new surface areas to achieve a uniform color and texture. Work coating to natural breaks. 3.4 MIXING A. Mix waterproof coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Mix waterproof coating to ensure uniform color and texture. C. Mix waterproof coating to minimize air entrapment. 3.5 APPLICATION A. Apply waterproof coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings. B. Apply 1 coat of MasterProtect C350 coating over base coat of MasterProtect HB 200 or HB400. C. Maintain proper uniform wet-film thickness (WFT) during application.


D. Work to natural break and maintain wet edge during application. E. Apply waterproof coating using consistent techniques to achieve uniform thickness, consistent appearance, and uniform color and texture to blend existing surfaces and new repaired surfaces. Architect to review. F. Do not thin waterproof coating. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect applied waterproof coating to ensure that, except for normal weathering, coating will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 10 14 00 – SIGNAGE 10 14 00-1

SECTION 10 14 00

SIGNAGE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior signage of the following types: 1. Impressions, custom construction. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ICC/ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities. B. USATBCB - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 32 19. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature. C. Shop Drawings: List sign styles, lettering, locations and dimensions of each interior sign. D. Selection Samples: One complete set of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors. E. Verification Samples: Two full size samples, representing type, style and color specified including method of attachment. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ICC/ANSI A117.1 and ADAAG. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspect products upon receipt. Store products in manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Best Sign Systems, Inc.; 1202 N. Park Avenue, Montrose, CO 81401. ASD. TEL: (800) 235-BEST. FAX (970) 249-0223. Email: [email protected] www.bestsigns.com. B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.2 SIGNS A. ADA-Compliant Interior Signage, Custom Design: 2.3 INTERIOR SIGNAGE SCHEDULE A. Manufacturer’s standard monolithic tactile plaque constructed utilizing a thermoforming process, which provides a fully homogeneous plaque sign. The sign body, face, raised text and Braille are compression molded to form a single dimensional component that results in a sign surface that exhibits a toughness that resists scratching, cracking, gouging and graffiti. 1. Style: Custom Impressions Sign by Best Sign Systems, Inc

http://www.bestsigns.com/�


2. Material: Extruded Engineered PVC/Acrylic alloy with Integral background colors and high impact resistance. 3. Material: Extruded Engineered PVC/Acrylic alloy with Integral background colors and high impact resistance with Class 1A Fire Rating with qualifying order size 4. Sign Thickness: 1/8 inch (3mm) Not available for window signs or beveled edges 5. Tactile Characters/Symbols: Raised 1/32 inch (1 mm) from sign plate face 6. Construction: One-piece; added on or engraved characters not acceptable 7. Lettering Style: Typeface as selected from the manufacturer’s standard sans serf or simple serf typefaces, upper case letters, minimum height 5/8”, maximum height 2” 8. Braille: Grade 2 Braille, placed directly below last line of letters or numbers 9. Contrast: Letters, numbers and symbols shall contrast with background. 10. Bevel Options: Classic 11. Profiles: Standard Radiused Corners 12. Color of Background: As selected from manufacturer’s standard fourteen (14) background colors, color selected by Architect 13. Color of Text and Raised Characters: As selected from 73 standard colors 14. Surface Texture: Stipple PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installation areas to ensure that conditions are suitable for installation. B. Examine signage for defects prior to installation. Do not install damaged signage. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Verify mounting heights and locations for interior signage will comply with referenced standards. B. Clean mounting locations of dirt, dust, grease or similar conditions that would prevent proper installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install signs level, plumb, without distortion, and in proper relationship with adjacent surfaces using manufacturer's recommended standard mounting system. 1. Mount with silicone and vinyl foam tape. B. Remove adhesive from exposed sign surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. C. Clean signs after installation as recommended by manufacturer. D. Replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.4 INTERIOR SIGNAGE SCHEDULE A. Refer to the list of interior signs required for the project as attached to this Section. B. Identification System 1. Room Signage, Type S-1 a. Signs of laminated or colored plastic total thickness 0.125”. 1) Room Occupancy Name and Room Number sign shall be attached with silicone and vinyl foam tape as recommended by the manufacturer for permanent mounting. 2) Size of Sign: 4” high x 6” 3) Color: Dark stipple background with light colored letters. 4) Letters: Letters shall be raised 1/32” and shall be ¾” tall with Grade 2 Braille matching sign message. All letters shall be capitalized. 2. Fire Extinguisher Signage: “Fire Extinguisher Inside” – S-2 a. Sign 6” x 6” x .0125” thick red matte acrylic background with 5/8” raised (1/32”) white letters and numbers. Provide Grade 2 Braille at bottom of sign to match sign message. b. Mount at 5’0” above finish floor to centerline of sign. c. Attach with silicone and vinyl foam tape.


d. Provide one sign outside of all rooms containing FE’s and FEC’s. 3. Accessible and Unisex Toilet Room Pictogram – Sign S-3 a. Sign 6” x 6” x.0125” thick acrylic background with universal pictogram (color to be selected by Architect). b. Mount at 5’0” above finish floor to centerline of sign. c. Attach with four stainless steel screws and wall adhesive. d. Provide handicapped pictogram at all accessible Toilet Rooms and all Group Toilets. e. Provide standard pictogram at all other Toilet Rooms that are not accessible. 4. Accessible and Male/Female Toilet Room Pictogram – Sign S-4 a. Sign 6” x 6” x.0125” thick acrylic background with universal pictogram (color to be selected by Architect). b. Mount at 5’0” above finish floor to centerline of sign. c. Attach with four stainless steel screws and wall adhesive. d. Provide handicapped pictogram at all accessible Toilet Rooms and all Group Toilets. e. Provide standard pictogram at all other Toilet Rooms that are not accessible. 5. Location a. Signs are to be placed on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door. b. The dimension from the floor to the centerline of the sign or sign grouping is to be 60” c. For double doors, or if no wall space exists, sign is to be placed on the nearest adjacent wall. d. Space from door swing or any obstacles is to be a minimum of 3”. e. For overhead signs, the clearance is to be 6’ 8” (80”).

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 10 28 13 – TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13-1

SECTION 10 28 13

TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the Work of this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. This Section describes the materials and requirements for installation of washroom accessories shown on the Drawings. B. Coordinate the Work described in this Section with the Work of other trades to ensure proper installation. 1.3 STANDARDS A. Location and mounting of toilet accessories shall comply with ADA and ANSI 117.1 for compliance with physically handicapped accessibility. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 32 19 – SUBMITTALS PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Materials and Fabrication: All accessories shall be fabricated in accordance with commercial practice, with welds ground smooth. Bending, flanging, drawing, forming and similar operations performed in a manner to ensure that there are no defects. Flanges of recessed accessories shall return to walls to provide a continuous, tight against the wall installation. Doors shall be warp free. Key manufacturer’s standards locks alike for groups of accessories; two keys furnished for each key group. B. Finishes: Finishes on metals not specified otherwise shall be provided as follows: Metal Corrosion-Resisting Steel (Stainless Steel) General purpose polished

Finish

Aluminum Satin Anodic, Clear Carbon Steel Bright Chromium Plate Copper Alloy (Brass) Bright Chromium Plate Zinc Alloy (ZAMAC) Bright Chromium Plate C. Accessory Schedule: Provide one of the following manufacturer’s products for each item listed 1. Paper Towel Dispenser: to be furnished by Owner, installed by Contactor. 2. Room Deodorant Dispenser: to be furnished by Owner, installed by Contractor. 3. Grab Bars: 1 ½” diameter Type 304 stainless steel with concealed mounting flanges in lengths and configurations shown on the drawings. Anchorage shall resist a vertical pull test of 250 lbs. for 5 minutes without pull-out. Clearance between wall and grab bars shall be 1 ½” maximum for compliance with ANSI 117.1. a. Bobrick #B6806x36 b. Bradley #812x36 c. American Specialties, Inc. #3200 Seriesx36 4. Grab Bars: 1 ½” diameter Type 304 stainless steel with concealed mounting flanges in lengths and configurations shown on the drawings. Anchorage shall resist a vertical pull test of 250 lbs. for 5 minutes without pull-out. Clearance between wall and grab bars shall be 1 ½” maximum for compliance with ANSI 117.1. a. Bobrick #B6806x42 b. Bradley #812x42 c. American Specialties, Inc. #3200 Seriesx42 5. Soap Dispenser: Surface mounted - furnished by Owner, installed by Contractor

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 10 28 13 – TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13-2

6/7. Mirror: 24”x36” with Type 304 stainless steel heliarc welded corner frames and ¼” triple silvered back tempered plate glass mirror. a. Bobrick #B165-2436 b. Bradley #740-1830 c. American Specialties, Inc. #0535-1830 8. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Surface mounted, Multi Roll Dispenser a. Bobrick B-4288 b. Bradley 5A10 9. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Surface mounted 22 gauge Type 304 stainless steel a. Bobrick #B254 b. Bradley #4781-15 c. American Specialties, Inc. #0852 10. Waste Receptacle: Recessed, type 304 stainless steel to hold a minimum of 12 gallons with heavy duty liner equal to American Specialties, Inc. #0458-9, Bradley #344 11. Mop and Broom Holder: 18 gauge satin finish stainless steel unit by length 34”. a. Bobrick #B-223-24 b. Bradley #9953 12. Seat Cover Dispensers, Bobrick B-301, Bradley #584 13. Wall Mounted Baby Changing Station, Bobrick KB-200-00, Bradley 961 PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to site in unopened containers, labeled with the manufacturer’s names and brands, ready for installation. Store accessories in a safe, dry location until needed for installation. B. Locate toilet accessories as shown on the drawings. Grab bars shall be mounted at heights required by ANSI 117.1 and ADA. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Surfaces of fastening devices exposed after installation shall have the same finish as the attached accessory. Concealed anchorage wherever possible, exposed screw heads shall be tamper proof design. Protect exposed surfaces of accessories with strippable plastic or by other approved means until the installation is accepted. B. Coordinate accessory manufacturer’s mounting details with other trades as their work progresses. After installation, thoroughly clean exposed surfaces and restore damaged work to its original condition or replace with new work. C. Surface Mounted Accessories: Mount on concealed backplates, except where specified otherwise. Accessories without backplates shall have concealed fasteners. D. Except as otherwise indicated or specified otherwise, install accessories with sheet metal screws or wood screws in lead-lined braided jute, Teflon or neoprene sleeves, or lead expansion shields, or with toggle bolts or other approved fasteners as required by the construction. Install backplates in the same manner, or provide with lugs or anchors set in mortar. E. Fasten all accessories mounted on gypsum board and plaster walls without solid backing into the metal or wood studs or to 2 x 8 wood blocking secured between wood studs, or to metal backplates secured to metal studs. F. Protect accessories from damage until final acceptance of the Project. Damaged accessories or secured finishes shall be replaced. Clean all accessories after installation.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 10 44 00 – FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10 44 00-1

SECTION 10 44 00

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fire extinguisher – See plans for locations. 2. Fire extinguisher cabinets – See plans for locations. 3. Mounting Brackets. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. For fire extinguisher cabinets include rough-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style, door construction, panel style and materials. C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer’s color charts showing full range of colors available for those units with factory applied color finishes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain fire extinguisher and cabinets from one source from a single manufacturer. B. Coordination: Verify that extinguisher cabinets are sized to accommodate fire extinguisher specified. C. UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguisher approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for type, rating and classification of extinguisher and carry appropriate FM marking. D. FM-Listed Products: Fire extinguisher approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for type, rating and classification of extinguisher and carry appropriate FM marking. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Allenco 2. Ansul Fire Protection, Wormald US Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. J.L. Industries 5. Larsen’s Manufacturing Co. 6. Samson Metal Products, Inc. 7. Walter Kidde, Division of Kidde, Inc. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Provide fire extinguisher for each extinguisher cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard, which comply with requirements of governing authorities. 1. Abbreviations indicated below identify extinguisher types related to UL classification and rating system and not necessarily to type and amount extinguishing material contained in extinguisher.


B. Multi-purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL rated 2-a: 10: B: C, 10 lb. nominal capacity, in enameled steel container with current inspection labels attached. Provide 10 lb. nominal capacity purple “K” extinguisher for Electrical and I.T. Rooms. 2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. General: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets where indicated, of suitable size for housing fire extinguisher of type and capacity indicated. B. Construction: Manufacturer’s standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim, style and door style indicated. Weld all joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld permanent door frames. C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for mounting conditions indicated, of the following types: 1. Semi-recessed: Cabinet box (tub) partially recessed in 8” masonry walls. 2. Semi-recessed: Cabinet box (tub) partially recessed in 4” stud walls D. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded and ground smooth. E. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer’s standard door construction, of material indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Enameled Steel: Manufacturer’s standard finish, hollow steel door construction with tubular stiles and rails. 2. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Type I, Quality q3, Class as follows: a. Clear glass, Class 1 (transparent) F. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with lettering spelling “FIRE EXTINGUISHER” applied to door. Provide lettering to comply with requirements indicated for letter style, color, size, spacing and location or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard arrangements. 1. Application Process: Engraved 2. Door Style: Manufacturer’s standard design 3. Full-Glass Panel: Float glass, 1/8” thick G. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer’s standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style and door material and style indicated. Provide either level handle with cam action latch, or door pull, exposed or concealed, and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous type hinge permitting door to open 180°. 2.4 FINISHES FOR FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipment. 2.5 STEEL FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FINISHES A. Baked Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply manufacturer’s standard 2 coat baked enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer’s instructions for application and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 1. Color and Gloss: As indicated by reference to manufacturer’s standard color and gloss designations. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install items included in this Section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. 1. Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinet as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim. Comply with Manufacturer’s instructions.


2. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Where exact location of surface mounted cabinets and bracket mounted fire extinguisher is not indicated, locate as directed by Architect.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 10 55 13 – MAILBOXES 10 55 13-1

SECTION 10 55 13

MAILBOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. 4C Horizontal Mailboxes. 1. Rear-loading interior (or exterior) mailboxes. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board. 1.3 REFERENCES A. United States Postal Service (USPS): 1. USPS-STD-4C: United States Postal Service Standard 4C, Wall-Mounted Centralized Mail Receptacles. 2. USPS PUBLICATION 16. B. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board (ATBCB): Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) for Buildings and Facilities. C. IBC - International Building Code. D. ASTM A 666 - Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar. E. ASTM B 209 - Specification Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. F. ASTM B 221 - Specification Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bar, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00. B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions and finishes. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of mailboxes, wall cuts, and interface with other products. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 2 inches (50 mm) square, representing actual color and texture. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with USPS-STD-4C for wall-mounted centralized mailboxes. B. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have a Quality System in place to ensure and be able to substantiate that manufactured units conform to requirements and match the approved design and must be ISO 9001:2008 certified.


1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspect the materials upon delivery to ensure that specified products have been received. B. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. C. Handle materials to prevent damage or marring of finish. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard warranty to repair or replace components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within one year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Salsbury Industries, Toll Free Tel: 800-MAILBOX (800-624-5269); Email: [email protected]; Web: www.mailboxes.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 WALL-MOUNTED CENTRALIZED MAIL RECEPTACLES - HORIZONTAL MAILBOXES A. 2200 Series Rack Ladder System as manufactured by Salsbury Industries consisting of multiple compartments enclosed within recessed wall box. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from rear of unit with accessibility to entire group of compartments. Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by swinging compartment door.

1. Model: 2200 Series. Rack Ladder System, Front Loading a. Module: Refer to the Drawings for module numbers and layout. b. Modules: 2202 & 2204.

2. Mounting: Recessed mounted. 3. Locks: 5 pin cylinder cam lock, 2keys each lock. 4. Box Identification:

a. Engraved Identifier with Black Infill. 5. Mail Distribution:

a. Mail Distribution: Private. 6. Material and Finish: Aluminum with powder coated finish.

a. Color: Aluminum - standard. 7. Front-Loading Door: Side hinged, fabricated from aluminum sheet with full-length, aluminum

continuous piano hinge on one side and positive-latching mechanism on the other. Fabricate rear-loading door to open not less than 90 degrees and to remain open while mail is deposited. Model #2251

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings in wall are correctly located, aligned, and sized for mailboxes. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces with mild dish detergent. Do not use harsh abrasive cleaners. Lubricate locks with graphite type lubricants only.

http://www.mailboxes.com/�


3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Protect finishes from damage by construction activities.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 12 24 13 – ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13-2

SECTION 12 24 13

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. SUPPLIER: Furnish and install Electric Roller Shades (Premium Quality) B. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry 2. Section 08 41 13: Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 1.2 REFERENCES A. FLAME-RESISTANT MATERIALS SHALL PASS OR EXCEED ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING TESTS: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 701 (small scale for horizontal applications) 2. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 302 Flammability of Interior Materials 3. Federal Standard 191 Method 5903 (used by Port Authority of New York and New Jersey for drapery, curtain, and upholstery material) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. PRODUCT DATA: Manufacturer’s descriptive literature shall be submitted indicating materials, finishes, construction and installation instructions and verifying that product meets requirements specified. Manufacturers recommendations for maintenance and cleaning shall be included. B. DRAWINGS AND DIAGRAMS: Wiring diagrams of any motorized components or units, working and assembly drawings shall be supplied as requested. C. SAMPLE: Supply one sample shade of each type specified in this contract for approval. Supplied units shall be furnished complete with all required components, mounting and associated hardware, instructions and warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Supplier: Manufacturer, subsidiary or licensed agent shall be approved to supply the products specified, and to honor any claims against product presented in accordance with warranty. B. INSTALLER: Installer or agent shall be qualified to install specified products by prior experience, demonstrated performance and acceptance of requirements of manufacturer, subsidiary, or licensed agent. Installer shall be responsible for an acceptable installation. C. UNIFORMITY: Provide Manual Roller Shades of only one manufacturer for entire project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Product shall be delivered to site in manufacturer’s original packaging. B. Product shall be handled and stored to prevent damage to materials, finishes and operating mechanisms. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Prior to shade installation, building shall be enclosed. B. Interior temperature shall be maintained between 60° F. and 90° F. during and after installation; relative humidity shall not exceed 80%. Wet work shall be complete and dry. 1.7 WARRANTY: A. Lifetime Limited Warranty. Fabrics warranted for 5 years. Specific product warranties available from manufacturer or its authorized agent.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hunter Douglas Architectural Phone: 800-727-8953 Fax: 800-205-9819/ Website: www.HDarchitectural.com. B. Product substitutions must be approved by architect minimum of 30 days prior to close of bid. 2.2 MANUAL ROLLER SHADES A. PRODUCT: Hunter Douglas “Manual Roller Shades” B. MATERIALS: 1. FABRICS: Inherently anti-static, flame retardant, fade and stain resistant, light filtering, room darkening, & blackout fabrics providing 0% - 15% openness factors. Fabric weights to range between 6.00 oz/sq.yd. – 20.70 oz/sq.yd. containing fiberglass, PVC, polyester, acrylic, vinyl laminates, cotton, & vinyl coatings. Finish selected by architect from manufacturer’s available contract colors. 2. CONTROL SYSTEM: Adjustment-free continuous qualified #10 stainless steel ball chain (90-lb. test) and pulley clutch operating system allows precise control and ensures a uniform look. Clutch will develop no more than ½ pound drag for ease of lifting. Glass reinforced polyester thermopolymer (PBT) plastic components conform to military specification MIL M-24519 and designed for smooth, trouble-free operation. 3. ROLLER: Circular-shaped painted extruded aluminum tubes with thicker wall & ribs provide additional strength while locking into place the clutch & end plug. 3” outside diameter extruded tube to have a .090 wall thickness. 2” outside diameter extruded tube to have a .072” wall thickness (1 ½” & 1 1/8” tubes have .055” wall thickness) providing strength & durability. 4. END PLUG: Heat stabilized fiber reinforced plastic outside sleeve and center shaft provide bearing surfaces on which the roller rides ensuring smooth, wear resistant operation. 5. BOTTOM ROD: Extruded aluminum weight in a Sealed Pocket Hem Bar, or Flat Bottom Bar for fabrics that are not seamable. Bottom rod is for tracking adjustments and provides uniform look. 6. MOUNTING HARDWARE: Manufacturer’s standard .07” nickel-plated, C1008/1010 cold rolled steel universal brackets including end plug bracket with lock down retainer device. 7. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS: Fascia, Fabric Wrapped Hembar, and Banded Shades. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shade measurements shall be accurate to within + 1/8” or as recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2.4 FABRICS A. FABRIC selection from the following: E Screen 7505. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. SUBCONTRACTOR shall be responsible for inspection on site, approval of mounting surfaces, installation conditions and field measurement for this work. B. OTHER INTERACTING TRADES shall receive drawings of shade systems, dimensions, assembly and installation methods from subcontractor upon request. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. INSTALLATION shall comply with manufacturer’s specifications, standards and procedures as detailed on contract drawings. B. ADEQUATE CLEARANCE shall be provided to permit unencumbered operation of shade and hardware. C. CLEAN finish installation of dirt and finger marks. Leave work area clean and free of debris.

http://www.hdarchitectural.com/�


3.3 DEMONSTRATION: A. Demonstrate operation method and instruct owner’s personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the blinds. 3.4 SCHEDULE: A. EXTERIOR WINDOWS 1. Provide at all exterior windows and provide fixed screens at windows with radiused top. END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 12 32 16 - PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK 12 32 16-1

SECTION 12 32 16

PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes wood cabinets and countertops. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Surfaces: surfaces visible when drawers and opaque doors are closed; bottoms of casework 43” or more above finished floor. B. Semi-exposed Surfaces: Surfaces which become visible when opaque doors are open or drawers are extended; bottoms of casework are more than 30” and less than 42” above finished floor. C. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces considered concealed when surfaces not visible after installation; bottoms of casework less than 30” above finished floor; tops of casework over 78” above finished floor and not visible from an upper level; stretchers, blocking, and components concealed by drawers. D. Flush Overlay: Door and drawer faces cover cabinet frame with space between faces sufficient for operating clearance. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data for each hardware type specified. 2. Shop drawings for casework showing location and size, accessories, materials, finishes, and filler panels. Include fully dimensioned plans, elevations, and anchorage details to countertop and walls. 3. Shop drawings for countertops showing sizes, shapes, edge and backsplash profiles, cutouts for plumbing fixtures, and methods of joining. 4. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated or exposed to view. 5. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying that materials furnished comply with specified requirements. 6. Maintenance data for plastic laminate casework for inclusion in Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain plastic laminate casework from one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver casework as a factory-assembled unit, packaged individually, and shipped each in its own carton. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with casework manufacturer's recommendations for optimum temperature and humidity conditions during storage and installation. Do not install casework until these conditions have been attained and stabilized. B. Field Measurements:


1. Verify casework dimensions by field measurements. Verify casework to be installed in compliance with the original design and referenced standards. 2. Verify countertop size and shape prior to fabrication by field measurements taken after base units are installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Casework: a. Smith Products, Palatka b. Trimline c. LSI d. American Desk Company e. Gulf Millwork & Fixture Co, Tampa, Florida f. TK Cabinets 2. Plastic Laminate for Countertops: a. Domtar Industries, Inc. b. Formica Corp. c. Laminart d. Nevamer Corp. e. Sterling Engineered Products, Inc., Pionite f. Westinghouse Electric Corp., Micarta Div. g. Wilson Plastics Co., Dart Industries, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Sizes, dimensions, and thicknesses given are minimum dimensions. B. High Density Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, mat-formed particleboard, Grade 1-M-2 with minimum density of 45 pcf, internal bond of 60 psi, and minimum screw-holding capacity of 225 lbs. on faces and 200 lbs. on edges. C. Plywood: All cabinets in wet areas shall be constructed of plywood veneer, in material of millwork shop's option. No particleboard will be accepted in wet areas. D. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3; in thicknesses indicated and colors and patterns, and finishes as selected from approved samples. E. Thermoset Decorative Finish: ALA-1985; Melamine or polyester. F. Exposed surfaces shall be laminated with nominal .028" decorative high pressure plastic laminate, selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors and patterns (40 solid colors, 5 wood grain patterns minimum). Interior of open cabinets in public areas (classrooms, offices, etc.) shall be considered exposed. G. Non-exposed surfaces shall be melamine or polyester. Exposed particle board or plywood is unacceptable. H. Door and drawer fronts shall be edge banded in 3 mm thick PVC in manufacturer's standard colors (minimum of 4 solid colors). Edges shall be eased and corners shall be radiused on door and drawer fronts. Exposed cabinet edges shall be banded with 1 mm PVC edge banding in manufacturer's standard colors (minimum 4 solid colors) or in matching nominal .028" high pressure laminate. Shelves shall be banded on the lead edge with 1 mm PVC edge banding in color to match manufacturer's standard interior color. I. Adjustable Shelves shall rest on metal shelf support pins equal to KV 346, inserted into holes row-bored a minimum of 32mm on center. KV 256 clips inserted in KV 255 shelf standards routed flush with cabinet interior surface shall be an acceptable alternate. J. Locks shall be 5 disk tumbler equal to National Lock Remove-A-Core series. Locks may be keyed alike or keyed different with a minimum of 200 key changes. Two master keys shall be furnished to permit opening of any lock. Furnish locks as indicated on drawings.


K. Hinges shall be .95" steel five knuckle hospital-tip institutional quality with .187" diameter tight pin. Each hinge shall be secured with a minimum of eight No. 8 screws. Hinge shall permit door to swing 270° without binding. Doors less than 48" in height shall have two hinges over 48" in height shall have three hinges. Hinges to be "satin chrome". L. Pulls: All pulls shall be round tube type at least 4" in length w/min. 1” clearance for finger pulls shall be stainless steel. M. Door Catches: Base and wall cabinets shall utilize a 7 pound pull magnetic catch. Tall cabinets have heavy duty spring loaded roller catch with molded plastic bumper/strike. 2.3 WOOD CASEWORK FABRICATION A. Cabinets shall be constructed utilizing at a minimum 45# medium density industrial grade particle board and AB grade, exterior glue fir plywood. Sound grade solid hardwood may be substituted for particle board for drawer box components, hanging rails, cabinet rails between drawers, and door frames for glazed doors. Fiberboard shall not be acceptable for any cabinet or drawer components. Materials and minimum thicknesses of cabinet components shall be as follows: Sink Cabinet Tops, Bottom, Ends 3/4" Fir Plywood Sink Cabinet Backs 1/4" Fir Plywood Sink Cabinet Doors, Fronts 3/4" Fir Plywood Std. Cabinet Tops 3/4" Fir Plywood Std. Cabinet, Bottoms, Ends 3/4" 45# Particle Board Std. Cabinet Doors, Drawer Fronts 3/4" 45# Particle Board Std. Cabinet Backs 1/2" 45# Particle Board Std. Cabinet Finished Backs 3/4" Fir Plywood Cabinet Shelves to 36" Width 3/4" 45# Particle Board Cabinet Shelves over 36" Width 1" 45# Particle Board Drawer Box Sides, Back, Front 1/2" 45# Particle Board Drawer Bottom 1/2" 45# Particle Board Aprons, Fillers, Cabinet Rails Hanging Rails, Miscellaneous 3/4" 45# Particle Board 2.4 WOOD CASEWORK, FINISHES A. Factory Finishing: To the greatest extent possible, finish casework at factory. Defer only final touch-up until after installation. B. Finish: Provide selections made by Architect from full range of standard finishes available. 2.5 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK A. Face style: Flush overlay. B. Construction: Case body members shall be joined as approved by AWI 1600B-S-4. C. A full depth sub-top shall be utilized for all base cabinets except sink cabinets. Sink cabinets shall utilize a 3/4"x7" (min.) panel in lieu of a top front cross rail. D. Cabinet backs shall be nailed and glued into a dado in cabinet ends. Backs nailed or stapled on flush or in a rabbet are unacceptable. E. Cabinets shall rest on a continuous plinth base of 1x4 pressure treated pine or 3/4" exterior glue fir plywood. Base shall consist of a front and back rail connected by cross rails spaced 24" o.c. Plinth base shall be leveled by means of adjusting bolts, hardwood shims or other mechanical device spaced 24" o.c. Softwood shims, cedar shakes, or other such mechanisms that compress or shift under load are unacceptable as leveling devices. 2.6 COUNTERTOPS, PLASTIC LAMINATE A. Countertops shall be constructed of 3/5" 45# density particle board. A 3/4" x 3" 45# density particle board buildup strip shall be applied at the back, front and end edges of the top to provide a 1-1/2" thick finished edge. Edges of top shall be laminated prior to surface of tops with nominal .050" high pressure plastic laminate. Underside of tops shall be laminated with a nominal .020" backing sheet at locations


where underside is visible (knee spaces, etc.) and at sink locations. At sink locations, 3/4" 45# density particle board. B. Backsplashes shall be 3/4"x4" typical, particle board at dry locations, plywood at wet locations. Top edge shall be laminated prior to face with nominal .050" high pressure plastic laminate. Backsplashes shall be field applied using an adhesive caulking material equal to Phenoseal. C. The Architect will select laminate from casework laminate manufacturer in the event that countertop and casework laminates are required to match. D. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front style, cove, and backsplash style. 1. Front Style: Rolled 2. Backsplash and Endsplash Style: Curved or waterfall shape with scribe. 3. Accessories: Provide (60) tray drawers of glass reinforced fiberglass with rim return & label holder. 17" x 11 1/2" x 3 3/4" deep. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces, using concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe, and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face. B. Install casework without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. C. Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8” in 8’. D. Fasten unit of casework to adjacent unit and into structural support members of wall construction with #10 sheet metal or wood screws with washer head or washer. E. Fasten plastic laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks in base units into underside of countertop. Spline and glue joints in countertops and provide concealed mechanical clamping of joint. F. Fasten filled-polymer countertops by screwing through corner blocks in base units into underside of countertop. Align adjacent surfaces. Form seams 1/8” wide and adhere with manufacturer's recommended joint adhesive in color to match countertop. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and lubricate to provide unencumbered operation. Doors shall swing freely, catches shall hold securely, and all doors shall be aligned both vertically and horizontally with each other. Drawers shall open and close smoothly, without binding and without excess side play. B. Keys shall be labeled appropriately and turned over to the Owner. C. Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. D. Advise Owner of procedures for protection of installed materials from damage by work of other trades.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 12 48 26 – MODULAR ENTRANCE FLOORING 12 48 26-1

SECTION 12 48 26

MODULAR ENTRANCE FLOORING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following Modular Entrance Flooring: 1. Basis of Design: Coral® Brush Tile B. Related Sections 1. Concrete: Refer to Division 3 Concrete Sections for cast-in-place concrete, concrete toppings, and cementitious underlayments. 2. Resilient Flooring Accessories: Refer to Division 9 Finishes Sections for resilient wall bases, reducer strips, metal edge strips and other resilient flooring accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the "Conditions of the Contract" and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit three (3) copies of the manufacturer’s technical data and installation recommendations for each type of flooring and accessory products specified. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings showing layout, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 2. Show details of profiles and product components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures. D. Samples: Submit three (3) sets of samples of each type, color and finish of flooring and accessory products specified, with an indication of full range of color, pattern and texture variation. Provide samples with a minimum size of 6” x 9” for flooring products and 6” in length for accessories. E. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Submit three (3) copies of the manufacturer’s Product Technical Data Sheet, specifying performance characteristics, criteria and physical requirements. 2. Submit three (3) copies of the manufacturer's written installation recommendations. F. Closeout Submittals: 1. Submit three (3) copies of the maintenance and operations data. This should include methods for maintaining the installed products and any precautions against cleaning materials or methods that are detrimental to the product and their performance. 2. Submit three (3) copies of the warranty as specified herein. 3. Installer Certification: Submit proof of certification from the manufacturer certifying that the installers comply with the specified requirements. G. Replacement Material: After completion of work, deliver to project site replacement materials from the same manufactured lot as materials installed. Package materials with protective covering and identify each with descriptive labels. 1. Flooring Materials: No less than 50 square feet of each type, pattern and color installed. 2. Accessories: No less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof each different type and color installed. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Whenever possible, provide each type of flooring as provided by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, patching and leveling compounds.


B. Flooring Contractor Qualifications: 1. The awarded flooring contractor shall be an established firm, experienced in the installation of the specified product and shall have access to all manufacturer’s required specifications, technical, installation and maintenance related documents. C. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project. 1. Engage installers certified by Forbo as a “Forbo Certified Modular Technician.” 2. Proof of valid certification must be submitted to the General Contractor and verified by Forbo prior to the start of the project. 3. Forbo Certified Modular Technicians must be present on the jobsite daily. D. Regulatory Requirements: Provide flooring products with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing identical products in accordance with the latest version of ASTM method indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. ASTM E 648 – Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source or NFPA 253 – Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor- Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 2. ASTM E 662 – Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials or NFPA 258 – Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. 3. ASTM D 2859 – Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Coverings (Pill Test) E. Post-Installation Meetings: Conduct post-installation meetings to review methods and procedures related to floor care and warranty requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Comply with requirements according to the "Conditions of the Contract" in Division 1 Closeout Submittals Warranty Section for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit the manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official for Owner's acceptance. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents. 1. Warranty Period: Five(5) year limited warranty commencing on Date of Original Purchase from manufacturer. C. Installation Warranty: Submit the flooring contractor’s installation warranty signed by the General Contractor and Installer for Owner’s Acceptance, agreeing to repair or replace work which has failed a as result of defects in workmanship. Failure shall include, but not limited to, tearing, cracking, separation, deterioration or loosening from substrate, seam failure, ripples, bubbling or puckering. Upon notification of such installation deficiencies, within the warranty period, make necessary repairs or replacement at the convenience of the Owner. Other guaranties or warranties may not be substituted by the Contractor for the terms of this warranty. Installation warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) year limited warranty commencing on Date of Substantial Completion from flooring contractor. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with the Division 1 Product Requirements Sections. B. Ordering: Comply with the manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. 1. All materials (flooring, adhesives and accessories) should be stored in areas that are fully enclosed and weathertight. The permanent HVAC should be fully operational and controlled and set at a minimum temperature 65°F. If this is not possible, the areas should be acclimated


and controlled by means of temporary HVAC to the service level conditions expected during occupancy. The temperature and humidity should range from 75° F ± 10°F with a 50% ± 10% ambient relative humidity. 2. Store modular cartons stacked per the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Comply with the manufacturer’s recommendation for the acclimation of all materials in the space where they will be installed for at least 48 hours prior to the installation unless longer conditioning periods are required by the manufacturer. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements/Conditions: 1. Areas to receive material should be clean, fully enclosed and weather tight. The permanent HVAC should be fully operational and controlled and set at a minimum temperature 65° F . If this is not possible, the areas should be acclimated and controlled by means of temporary HVAC to the service level conditions expected during occupancy. The temperature and humidity should range from 75° F ± 10°F with a 50% ± 10% ambient relative humidity. These conditions MUST be established at least seven days prior to beginning the installation, maintained during the installation, and continued for at least seven days following the installation. 1. The flooring material should be conditioned in the same manner for at least 48 hours prior to the installation. 2. Substrate evaluation and preparation should not begin until a stable, conditioned environment has been established as described in this section. 3. Areas to receive flooring must have adequate lighting to allow for proper inspection and preparation of the substrate, installation of the flooring and final inspection. B. Temperature Requirements: Maintain air temperature in spaces where products will be installed for time period before, during, and after installation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Temperature Conditions: 65° F for at least seven days prior to beginning the installation, maintained during the installation, and continued for at least seven days following the installation. C. Substrate Conditions: 1. Concrete Curing: Do not install flooring over concrete substrates until substrates have cured and are dry to bond with adhesive as determined by the concrete and flooring manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Testing Results: Conduct and document pre-installation testing as specified by manufacturer in accordance with the latest version of the specified test methods. a. Substrate Porosity Testing: ASTM F 3131 – Standard Practice for Field Determination of Substrate Water Absorption (Porosity) for Substrates to Receive Resilient Flooring. b. pH testing: ASTM F 710 – Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. c. In-situ Relative Humidity Testing: ASTM F 2170 – Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. d. Calcium Chloride Testing: ASTM F 1869 – Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emissions Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. e. Surface Moisture Testing: ASTM F 2659 – Standard Guide for Preliminary Evaluation of Comparative Moisture Condition of Concrete, Gypsum Cement and other Floor Slabs and Screeds Using a Non- Destructive Electronic Moisture Meter. f. Bond Testing: Conduct testing and document results in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation recommended in writing by the manufacturer. 4. Installation should not begin until the work of all other trades has been completed, especially overhead trades. 5. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installation on top of flooring material, install flooring material before these items are installed. D. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MODULAR ENTRANCE CARPETING A. Basis of Design 1. Material Name: Coral®Brush Tile 2. Description: Incorporates three types of 100% Econyl®

3. Concrete Substrates: Concrete substrates shall be cured per the concrete manufacturer’s recommendations. They must have a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi and a minimum dry density of 150 pounds per cubic foot. Refer to Division 3 Concrete Sections for

regenerated solution dyed polyamide yarns giving a blended appearance – capillary yarns for absorbing moisture, active dirt scraping yarns to quickly brush off soil, and heavy duty textured yarns which retain its appearance. 3. Size: Approximately 19.69” x 19.69” (50cm x 50cm) 4. Gauge: 9mm (0.35”) 5. Pile Thickness: 6mm (0.24”) 6. Backing: Bitumen 7. Color and Pattern: Colors and patterns shall be selected by Architect. Patterns shall be defined in any given area, applied in stripes, diagonals, checkerboard pattern and other designs as determined by the Architect. All selections shall be made from the manufacturer’s full product lines (including premium colors). See Architectural drawings for color schedule list in reference to this material. 8. Adhesive: Manufacturer recommendation for slab conditions PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product technical data, including product technical bulletins, installation recommendations and floor care recommendations. 3.2 INSPECTION A. Site Verification of Conditions: The Flooring Contractor and Installer shall examine and verify conditions previously described in other sections under which flooring and accessories are to be installed to be in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation recommendations and must notify the General Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Work shall not proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to acceptable conditions to the Owner and Architect. B. Material Inspection: Visually inspect all materials prior to installation in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation recommendations. Material with visual defects shall not be installed and shall not be considered as a legitimate claim if they are installed. 3.3 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s written installation recommendations for preparing substrates indicated to receive flooring products and accessories. B. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation. C. Surface Preparation: 1. General: Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM industry standards. Work shall not proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to acceptable conditions to the Owner and Architect. 2. Substrate: Substrates to receive flooring must be structurally sound, rigid, smooth, flat, clean, and permanently dry. The substrates must be free of all foreign materials including, but not limited to, dust, solvent, paint, wax, oils, grease, residual adhesive, adhesive removers, film-forming curing compounds, silicate penetrating curing compounds, sealing, hardening or parting compounds, alkaline salts, excessive carbonation or laitance, mold, mildew, and other foreign materials that might affect the rate of moisture dissipation from the concrete, the adhesion of flooring to the concrete or cause a discoloration of the flooring from below.


patching, repairing crack materials and leveling compounds with Portland cement based compounds. a. Refer to Division 3 Concrete Sections for cast-in-place concrete, concrete toppings, and cementitious underlayments. b. Reference Standard: Comply with the latest version of ASTM F 710 – Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. D. Substrate Testing: In order to ensure that the moisture condition of concrete substrates is within acceptable limits, it is essential that moisture testing be conducted and documented on ALL concrete substrates regardless of age or grade level, including those where resilient flooring has already been installed. Moisture testing should only be conducted once a stable, conditioned environment has been established in accordance with the latest version of the specified test methods. All other testing types shall be conducted on all substrate types. A diagram of the area showing the location and results of each test should be submitted to the Architect, General Contractor or End User. If at the time of testing the test results exceed the limitations set forth by the flooring manufacturer, the installation must not proceed until the problem has been corrected. The Contractor responsible for the substrate shall be responsible for the costs associated with analysis of the substrate and subsequent remediation requirements. 1. Surface Moisture Testing: ASTM F 2659 – Standard Guide for Preliminary Evaluation of Comparative Moisture Condition of Concrete, Gypsum Cement and other Floor Slabs and Screeds Using a Non- Destructive Electronic Moisture Meter. 2. In-situ Relative Humidity Testing: ASTM F 2170 – Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Material Installation: After establishing the starting lines, spread the adhesive using a 3/8” nap roller for releasable installations or the recommended trowel for permanent installations ensuring enough adhesive is being applied (refer to the spread rate on the adhesive bucket lid sticker). Be sure to spread adhesive all the way to the starting line without leaving any voids. For releasable installations, allow the adhesive to turn clear and dry to the touch before installing the flooring. After turning clear, the flooring MUST be placed into the adhesive within four (4) hours. Begin laying tiles at the starting point, ensuring that the tile is placed exactly along the layout lines. If the first few tiles are not installed accurately, the entire installation will be affected. Immediately roll the flooring in all directions using a 100 lb. roller to ensure proper adhesive transfer. Additional rolling is required during adhesive setup to ensure that the material is flat and fully adhered. The use of a three-section wall roller or steel seam roller is required at walls, under toe kicks or anywhere the full weight of a 100 lb. roller cannot access or be applied. B. Releasable Adhesive Application: Use roller recommended by flooring manufacturer for Forbo FST 1299 adhesive. 1. 3/8” nap roller 2. Spread rate is approximately 300 ft2

7. Immediately roll the flooring in all directions using a 100 lb. roller to ensure proper adhesive transfer. Additional rolling is required during adhesive setup to ensure that the material is flat and fully adhered. The use of a three-section wall roller or steel seam roller is required at

/gallon C. Installation Techniques: 1. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installation on top of finished flooring, install flooring before these items are installed. 2. Scribe, cut, fit flooring to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures and built-in furniture, including pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, nosings, and cabinets. 3. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. 4. Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items occurring within finish floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers. 5. Do not install resilient flooring over expansion joints. Use expansion joint covers manufactured for use with resilient flooring. Refer to other specification sections for expansion joint covers. 6. Adhere resilient flooring to substrate without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed installation. a. Use adhesive applied to the substrate in compliance with the flooring manufacturer’s recommendations, including those for proper spreading of the adhesive, adhesive missing and adhesive open and working times.


walls, under toe kicks or anywhere the full weight of a 100 lb. roller cannot access or be applied. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon request of the Owner, General Contractor or Architect, and with at least 72 hours’ notice, provide manufacturer's field service consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visit for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Do not allow heavy traffic or rolling loads for at least 72 hours following the installation. Additional time may be necessary if the installation is over a non-porous substrate. Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction. Remove and legally dispose of protective covering at time of Substantial Completion. 3.7 CLEANING A. Initial Maintenance: In order to allow the adhesive to dry and cure properly, wait a minimum of five days following the installation before conducting wet cleaning procedures or initial maintenance. Additional time may be necessary if the installation is over a non-porous substrate. B. Procedure: 1. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations prior to Owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris. 2. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaning methods recommended by floor manufacturer. 3. Remove all surface soil, debris, sand and grit by vacuuming using a dual motor upright vacuum with a rotating brush. The brush should be approximately 1/8” below the vacuum cleaner casing to ensure proper agitation. Make several passes with the vacuum cleaner to ensure that all loose dirt is removed. Vacuum action should be fast forward and slow backward. 4. Provide regular care to keep product clean and prevent the accumulation of dirt and soil. Proper cleaning, such as daily vacuuming and routine hot water extraction, can reduce contamination to virtually non-existent levels. Identify sources of soiling and react to spills immediately, before they dry. 5. Spot clean if necessary by using the “Scrape, Scrub and Rinse” procedures. C. “Scrape, Scrub, And Rinse” Spotting Procedure: 1. Scrape up spills using a spatula or blunt edged scraper and wipe excess soil onto a cloth. 2. Apply a liberal amount of clean water to the spot. 3. Using a spatula, scrape the water and the remains of the spill into a paper towel or cloth. Keep scraping with the spatula until the spill is completely removed. 4. If the spill or stain is not completely removed, apply a general purpose spotter cleaner to a white cotton cloth and rub it into the spot. Do not be afraid to use aggressive scrubbing to remove set-in spills. A soft wire brush can be used to remove scuff marks or other set in spills. Refer to the list at the end of this section for recommended products.Be certain not to leave any detergent residue when cleaning. Any chemicals applied to the flooring must be removed. No more than 1 oz. per gallon should be used. 5. Using a spatula, scrape the water, any cleaner and the remains of the spill into a paper towel or cloth. Keep scraping with the spatula until the spill or stain is completely removed. 6. Rinse the area thoroughly with clean water to ensure that any cleaning solution is completely removed. 7. A spotter machinemay be used to perform rinsing throughout the spot cleaning process. 8. Allow a minimum of three hours drying time before traffic is allowed on the floor surface again. If traffic is allowed on the floor before it has completely dried, the fibers are more susceptible to attract soil, requiring additional cleaning procedures in these areas to achieve the desired result.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 31 11 00 – BUILDING EARTHWORK 31 11 00-1

SECTION 31 00 00

BUILDING EARTHWORK

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide building excavation, fill, backfill and compaction specified and shown on the drawings. Included is preparation of sub-grade for footings, slabs, and pavement within the general building area.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Test Reports: Submit two copies of the following reports directly from the testing and inspection service, one to the Owner and one to the Architect: 1. Report and certification of backfill and fill material. 2. Verification of each footing sub-grade. 3. Field density test reports. 4. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered. 5. Other tests and material certificates, as required.


A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Testing and Inspection Service: Contractor shall employ and pay a soil testing and inspection service

acceptable to the Owner and Architect to perform sampling and testing soil materials proposed for use in the work and field testing for quality control during earthwork operations. All testing and inspection shall be under the direct supervision of a registered Geotechnical Engineer.

C. Tests for Proposed Soil Materials:

1. Test soil materials proposed for use in the work and promptly submit test result reports. 2. Provide one optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered in

sub-grade and fills under building slabs and foundations and paved areas. Determine maximum densities in accordance with ASTM D1557.

3. For backfill and fill materials, perform a mechanical analysis, AASHTO T88; plasticity index, AASHTO T90; moisture-density curve, AASHTO T180 or ASTM D698.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Existing Utilities: 1. Locate existing underground utilities in the areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place,

provide adequate means of protecting during excavation operations. 2. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during

excavation, consult the utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with the Owner and public and private utility companies in keeping their respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the utility owner.

3. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by the Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided.

4. Demolish and completely remove from the site all existing underground utilities located within building area or indicated to be removed. Coordinate with local utility companies for shut-off of services if lines are active.

B. Use of explosives is not permitted.


C. Protection: Protect existing structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damages caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by excavation operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials for backfill and fill shall be inorganic, non-plastic, granular soils containing less than 8 percent material passing the No. 200 mesh sieve (relatively clean sand with a Unified Soil Classification of SP, SP-SM, SW, or SW-SM). The material should exhibit moisture content within +2 percent of the Modified Proctor optimum moisture content as defined by ASTM D1557.

2.2 VIBRATORY COMPACTION EQUIPMENT

A. Mechanical Hand Equipment: Hand vibratory sleds, rollers and tampers shall be capable of meeting the compaction requirements specified herein. Total weight shall be on the order of 100 to 500 pounds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which building excavation and fill is to be performed and do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING BUILDING AREAS

A. Clear and grub the entire building area to at least 5 feet beyond the perimeter of building, to remove stumps, roots, trees, vegetation, organic material, pavement, existing foundation remnants, any buried foundations or other structures and other obstructions to the work. Grub out or remove all roots larger than 1/4 inch in diameter, matted roots, other organic material to at least 2 feet below existing surface. These materials should be disposed of off-site.

B. Strip topsoil from areas within the building and slab areas and stockpile on the site for future use in

site grading. 3.3 COMPACTION OF EXPOSED SOILS

A. After clearing and grubbing, the cleared surfaces in construction areas should be proofrolled using the appropriate compaction equipment for site and soil conditions. Adjust the moisture content of the soil, as necessary, to aid compaction. Sufficient passes should be made to develop a minimum dry density of 95 percent of the Modified Proctor Maximum Dry Density (ASTM D1557) to a depth of 12 inches below the compacted surface. Replace all material, if determined to be deleterious, in areas that “yield” during the proof rolling operation and replace with suitable fill material.

3.4 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation consists of the removal and stockpiling or disposal of materials encountered when establishing the required grade elevations for the site including footings, utilities and all other items indicated on the drawings. Included is the removal and disposal of all underground structures and utilities within the building area, material of any classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions, and other materials encountered that are not classified as unauthorized excavation.

B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated sub-grade elevations or

side dimensions without the specific direction of the Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work shall be at the Contractor's expense. 1. Backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of the

same classification, unless otherwise directed by the Architect.

C. Additional Excavation: 1. When excavation has reached required sub-grade elevations, notify the inspection and testing

service who will make an inspection of conditions.


2. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at the required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace the excavated material.

3. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on the basis of contract conditions relative to changes in the work.

D. Stability of Excavations: 1. Slope the sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction.

Shore and brace where sloping is not possible either because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling.

2. Shoring and Bracing: Provide shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Dewatering:

1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into the excavations and flooding the project site and surrounding area.

2. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water from excavations to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to the stability of sub-grades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey the water away from excavations.

3. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside the excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations for site utilities as temporary drainage ditches.

F. Material Storage:

1. Stockpile excavated materials classified as satisfactory soil material where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.

2. Locate and retain fill materials away from edges of excavations. 3. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified.

G. Excavation for Structures: 1. Place and compact all fill material for the building pad prior to excavating for foundations. 2. Conform to the elevations and dimensions shown on the drawings, within a tolerance of plus

or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing backfill to proper bearing elevations and placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection.

3. After excavating footings and foundations, verify the in-place compaction. If necessary, compact the bottom of the excavations to achieve a minimum dry density of 95 percent of the Modified Proctor Maximum Dry Density (ASTM D1557). This density should be developed to a minimum depth of 12 inches below the bottom of the footings. Over-excavate and re-compact, as necessary, to fulfill the above compaction criteria. The moisture content of the foundation soils must be controlled during the compaction procedure to aid compaction.

H. Excavation for Trenches: Dig trenches to the uniform width required for the particular item to be

installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. 1. Excavate trenches to the depth indicated or required. Carry the depth of trenches for piping

to establish the indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond the building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze-ups.

2. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for the entire body of the pipe.

3. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18 inches of column or wall footings and which are carried below the bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to the level of the bottom of adjacent footing. Concrete is specified in Division 3.

4. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling authorized by the Architect. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.

I. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when the atmospheric

temperature is less than 35°F.


3.5 COMPACTION

A. General: Control soil compaction during construction for compliance with the percentage of density specified.

B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact below stripped existing sub-grade at all

footings and slabs and each layer of fill and backfill to not less than 95 percent of modified proctor dry density determined in accordance with ASTM D1557.

C. Moisture Control:

1. Where the sub-grade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction uniformly apply water to the surface of sub-grade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on the surface during or subsequent to compaction operations.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density.

3. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing, until the moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value.

3.6 BACKFILL AND FILL

A. General: 1. For all backfill and fill use satisfactory excavated or borrow material that has been sampled,

tested and approved by the soil testing agency. 2. Prior to backfill placement: Backfill excavations as promptly as the work permits, but not until

completion of the following: a. Completion of construction below finish grade including, where applicable,

dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. b. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities. c. Removal of concrete formwork. d. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials.

Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in manner to prevent settlement of the structure or utilities, or leave in place if required.

e. Removal of trash and debris. f. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls.

3. Fill placement shall not commence until the cleared surface has been satisfactorily proofrolled in accordance with Article 3.3.

B. Placement and Compaction:

1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 12 inches in loose depth. 2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide the optimum

moisture content of the soil material. Compact each layer to the required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to the required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of the backfill against structures by carrying the material uniformly around the structure to approximately the same elevation in each lift.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: 1. The testing service shall inspect and approve all subgrades and fill layers before further

construction work is performed. 2. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D2167

(rubber balloon test), ASTM D2922 (nuclear method), or ASTM D2937 (drive-cylinder method).

3. Footing Subgrade: For representative footings, conduct density tests to verify the required compaction and design bearing capacities. Perform tests in each spread footing (50 sq. and more) and one test per every 50 linear feet in continuous footing. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with the related tested strata, when acceptable to the Architect.

4. Building Slab Subgrade: Make at least one field density test of the sub-grade and each layer of compacted fill for every 5,000 square feet of building, but in no case less than two tests at each test level.


B. If, in the opinion of the Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, the sub-grade or fills which have been placed are below the specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no additional expense. 1. The results of density tests which may be selected will be considered satisfactory when they

are in each instance equal to or greater than the specified density, or if not more than one out of five consecutive tests has a value greater than two percent below the required density.

3.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Protection of Graded Areas: 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to the specified tolerances.

B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape, and compact to the required density prior to further construction. Use hand tamping for re-compaction over underground utilities and under floor sub-drains, if any.

3.9 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove all waste materials, including excavated material classified as unsatisfactory soil material, trash and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 31 11 00 – CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 11 00-1

SECTION 31 11 00

CLEARING AND GRUBBING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Remove all trees, logs, stumps, shrubs, brush, vegetation, excessive organic material, debris, existing

foundations, pavement, structures, fences and other items that would interfere with construction. 1.2 PROTECTION A. Adequate protection measures shall be provided to protect all workmen and passers-by. Streets and

adjacent property shall be duly protected throughout the work. B. Trees or plants that are indicated on the drawings to remain shall be adequately protected during

construction. C. Existing utility and drainage line shall be protected from damage and, if damaged, replaced or

repaired by the Contractor at his expense. If active utility lines are encountered, the Contractor shall take whatever steps are necessary to insure that the service is continued or immediately restored at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General Provisions of the contract including the general conditions, supplementary conditions and

general requirements apply to the work specified in this section. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil material removed from the surface of the site shall be stockpiled and reused at other locations

on the site as directed by the Engineer. B. All clearing and grubbing material or refuse other than topsoil shall become the property of the

Contractor and shall be removed from the property. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Clear and grub within the limits shown on the drawings. In areas marked for “Selective Clearing,”

remove only underbrush, trees and shrubs smaller than 4” caliper, and trees not flagged by the Owner for protection.

B. Grubbing: 1. Remove all stumps, roots over one inch (1") in diameter, and matted roots to the following

depths: a. Footing, slabs on grade, bottom slabs of structures: 18" b. Walks: twelve inches (12"). c. Roads and Parking Areas: 18". d. Areas to be Grassed or Landscaped: six inches (6"). e. Fills: twelve inches (12"). 2. In the case of footings, slabs on grade, bottom slabs of structures, roads and parking areas, or

other construction on fills, the greater depth shall apply. 3. Unless further cut is required, fill depressions made by grubbing and compact to density of

surrounding soil. 4. The debris shall be disposed of at an off-site location to be provided by the Contractor.

Temporary earth spoil-banks shall not obstruct drainage or damage trees or vegetation. All debris and surplus materials shall be removed from the site prior to final inspection.

5. Debris may not be burned on-site.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 31 25 00 – EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 25 00-1

SECTION 31 25 00

EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Contractor shall perform all work in a manner consistent with the St. Johns River Water Management District best management practices for control of erosion and sedimentation in all areas of the project site. Only general indication of minimal measures to be taken is illustrated on the Plans. The Contractor is solely responsible for repairs, damages and fines for onsite and offsite erosion, turbidity and deposition of sediment which arise from his operations. 1.2 WORKMANSHIP A. Prior to commencing any disturbance of pervious surfaces, the Contractor shall install facilities to prevent sediment and turbidity which may arise in the work area from leaving the site. Additions to those facilities shall be made as the progress of the work dictates. Newly installed and existing pipes shall be protected from siltation. Disturbed surfaces shall be temporarily grassed as soon as work ceases in that portion of the work area. 1.3 CLEANUP A. During the course of the work, deposits of sediment shall be removed whenever the deposit exceeds one-half the height of the protective device. Upon completion, all temporary facilities shall be completely removed and the areas dressed in a workmanlike manner. Pipes which are part of the affected systems shall be cleaned of all sediment. Grassed areas shall be maintained until a permanent stand of grass is established.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 31 31 16 – TERMITE CONTROL 31 31 16-1

SECTION 31 31 16

TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following: Soil treatment with termiticide.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Service Life of Soil Treatment: Soil treatment by use of a termiticide that is effective for not less than

five years against infestation of subterranean termites.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For termiticide, include the EPA-registered Label for termiticide products.

B. Product Certificates: For termite control products, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Qualifications Data: For installer of termite control products.

D. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for

Owner’s record information, including the following: 1. Date and time of application 2. Moisture content of soil before application 3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes and rates of application used 6. Areas of application 7. Water source for application

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this section

F. Certificate of Compliance: The licensed pest control company shall issue a Certificate of Compliance to

the authorities having jurisdiction stating the following: The building has received a complete treatment for the prevention of subterranean termites. Treatment is in accordance with rules and laws established by the Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides according to the EPA-Registered Label.

Product listed as registered for use as a preventative treatment for termites for new construction by the Florida Department of Agriculture under authority of Chapter 487, Florida Statutes.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products through one source.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen.

Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading and concreting operations. Treat

soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction.


1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor certifying that

termite control work consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months’ continuing service

including monitoring, inspection and re-treatment for occurrences of termite activity. Provide a standard continuing service agreement. State services, obligations, conditions and terms for agreement period and terms for future renewal options.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Termiticides: a. Aventis Environmental Science USA LP; Termidor b. Bayer Corporation; Premise 75 c. Syngenta; Demon TC

2.2 NOTICE OF TERMITE PROTECTION

A. Provide a permanent sign which identifies the termite treatment provider and need for re-inspection and treatment contract renewal shall be provided. The sign shall be posted near the water heater or electrical panel.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content of soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer’s written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations.

B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer’s EPA-Registered Label for products.

B. The licensed pest control service shall be Sentry Termite & Pest Control, 431 Atlantic Avenue,

Interlachen, FL 32148 Tel: 386-684-2847. Sentry Termite & Pest Control is currently the licensed pest control company for Azalea Health.


3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT

A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer’s EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. 1. Slabs-on-Grade: Underground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along with both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab and around interior column footers; also along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints and areas where slabs will be penetrated.

B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.

C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground

supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.

D. Post warning signs in areas of application.

E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping or other construction activities following application.

END OF SECTION

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING RENOVATION AND ADDITION SECTION 32 16 00 – CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, CURBS AND GUTTERS 32 16 00-1

SECTION 32 16 00

CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, CURBS AND GUTTERS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The work required under this section shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Concrete sidewalks, curbs and gutters. 2. Concrete equipment pads. 3. Reinforcement for above. 4. Surface finish. 5. Curing and sealing. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 00 00: Building Earthwork. 1.3 REFERENCES A. References include the following: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ANSI/ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete. 3. ANSI/ASTM A497 - Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ANSI/ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 5. ANSI/ASTM D1751 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 6. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement. 7. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. 8. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. 9. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. 10. ASTM C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 11. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 12. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Obtain materials from same source throughout. 1.5 TESTING A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for the services of a qualified, independent testing laboratory, approved by the Owner, to insure that all materials and procedures furnished under this Contract are in compliance with all of the provisions of the Specifications. B. The Contractor shall be required to cooperate with the representatives of the testing laboratory in every way and at no time prevent or hinder the performance of their work. C. Three (3) concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 or less cubic yards on each class of concrete placed each day. D. One (1) additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather and be cured on site under same conditions as concrete it represents. E. One (1) slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. 1. Include data on joint filler, admixtures and curing compounds.


2. Submit a jointing plan, including location of contraction joints, construction joints, expansion joints and elevations fifteen days (15) prior to beginning concrete paving. 3. Submit, at least 15 days prior to start of concrete paving, certified laboratory test reports sufficient to verify compliance of proposed mix design (proportions) with the specifications for type and strength of concrete. PART 2 – MATERIALS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150 type. B. Fine Coarse Aggregates: ASTM X33. C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. D. Air Entrainment Admixture: Darex. E. Curing and Sealing: Kure-N-Seal 30 as manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products. 2.3 FORM MATERIALS A. Wood or steel form material, profiled to suit conditions. Joint Filler: ANSI/ASTM D1751. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615; 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billed steel bars, uncoated finish. B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ANSI/ASTM A185; in flat sheets; coiled rolls; uncoated finish. Fabric size shall be 6 x 6W1.4 unless noted otherwise. C. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, minimum, 16-gauge size. D. Dowels: ASTM A615; 40 ksi yield grade, plain steel, uncoated finish. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. C171 Sheet materials for curing concrete. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. 2.7 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Provide concrete with the following characteristics: 1. Compressive strength at 28 days: 3,000 psi, unless as otherwise noted on drawings. C. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. D. Use set-retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. E. Add air entraining agent to concrete mix for concrete work subject to freeze/thaw cycling, and slabs on grade. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify compacted sub-grade and base is ready to support paving and imposed loads. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.


C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. B. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. 3.3 FORMING A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, and profile. B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. C. Place joint fillers in vertical position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement. D. Grading around sides of walk to have a minimum of ½ step down off sides of newly placed sidewalk units. Install in strict compliance with provisions of the contract. 3.4 REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. Place reinforcement as shown on drawings for slabs-on-grade. B. Interrupt reinforcement as control, contraction or expansion joints, as shown. C. Place reinforcement to achieve slab and curb alignment, as detailed. D. Provide dowelled joints at interruptions of concrete with one end of dowel set in capped sleeve to allow longitudinal movement, if and as shown. E. Horizontal reinforcing bars shall be supported over earth or forms on protected metal (galvanized, plastic, stainless steel) spacers, chairs, bolsters and ties, in accordance with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures." F. The minimum concrete cover, unless noted otherwise on the drawings, shall be as follows: 1. Three inches (3") when concrete is placed directly against earth. 2. Two inches (2") when concrete is exposed to weather or earth. 3. Three quarter inch (3/4") for general construction. G. Field lapped splices shall conform to Class "C" splices, as defined in ACI 318-83 unless noted otherwise on the drawings. H. Lap bars shall be provided at corners and abrupt changes in directions of walls and footings. I. Reinforcing in strip footings shall be continuous through all column footings (or splices to column footing reinforcing) and around all corners, intersections and steps. J. Welded wire fabric field splices shall be not less than two spacings (2) of cross wires or six inches (6"), whichever is greater. K. Placement of reinforcing steel shall be approved by the Engineer prior to placement of concrete. 3.5 FORMED JOINTS A. Place expansion control contraction joints at intervals, to correct elevation and profile, as shown. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints. B. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances. Recess top of filler one half inch (1/2"). C. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting base material during placement operations. D. Compact layers of base course material to not less than ninety-eight percent (98%) of maximum dry density, modified proctor, ASTM D2049.


3.6 PLACEMENT OF BASE COURSE A. Place base course on prepared sub-grade in compacted layers to establish required thickness and elevations. B. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting base material during placement operations. 3.7 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. 1. Hot Weather Placement: ACI 301. 2. Cold Weather Placement: ACI 301. B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. C. Place concrete to thickness indicated on the drawings. Concrete thickness shall be six inches (6"), unless noted otherwise, and is to be placed over 6 mil vapor barrier. D. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. Install all concrete on 6 mil vapor barrier. E. Slabs to receive welded wire fabric shall have two thirds (2/3) their total concrete depth placed, the fabric positioned properly, and then the final one third (1/3) of the concrete depth placed. F. Use mechanical vibrators for placement of all concrete; provide a standby vibrator on the job while placing. G. Place concrete to pattern indicated. Saw cut contraction joints three-sixteenth inch (3/16") wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut one-third into depth of slab. 3.8 FINISHING A. Area Paving: Heavy broom finish parallel to line of traffic, Wood float, or as shown. B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom finish perpendicular to traffic, radius and trowel joint edges. C. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. At the base of each walkway canopy wet column or downspout, sculpt the concrete surface to direct water away from and off the walkway area. E. At edges of sidewalk adjoining asphaltic paved areas with a level change, to be painted with 4” wide warning stripe - color per Architect. 3.9 PLACING JOINTS A. Place joints straight and vertical. B. Longitudinal and transverse joint spacing shall be at regular intervals. Individual spacings may vary slightly to next catch basin and manhole castings. C. The maximum allowable joint spacings are: 1. Twelve foot (12’) for slabs six inches (6”) and less in thickness. 2. Fifteen foot (15’) for slabs over six inches (6”) in thickness. 3. Length/width ratio of slabs shall not exceed 1:3. D. Joints shall be continuous across the slab and must extend completely through integral curbs. E. Full depth expansion joints one-half inch (1/2") wide shall be installed to isolate all fixed objects (manholes, casting, existing paving, etc.). F. Isolate from adjacent pavement all manhole covers and catch basin rims with a concrete collar and an expansion joint.


G. Jointing shall be in accordance with jointing plan approved by the Architect. H. Constructing Urethane Expansion Joints: 1. Concrete shall be placed with the pre-molded joint filler in place, and with a closed cell backer rod to allow for the proper sealant depth. 2. After the concrete has set, the joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and wire brushed to remove debris and/or curing compound, and primer shall be applied to surfaces which will receive sealant. Sealant shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces. Adjacent surfaces shall be protected with non-staining masking tape. The work shall be performed by a qualified professional caulker. 3. Primer and sealant shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations, using hand guns or pressure equipment on properly prepared surfaces. Temperature of sealant and concrete shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Sealant shall be forced into the joint in front of the tip of the caulking gun, not pulled after it, and shall be forced against the sides to prevent entrapped air or pulling of sealant off the sides. 4. Sealant shall be finished slightly recessed from the adjacent surface, adjusted in accordance with the outside air temperature. The colder the day, the greater the recess needed. Masking tape shall be removed immediately after tooling of the sealant and before the sealant face starts to skin over. Excess sealant shall be removed from adjacent surfaces. 5. Sealant shall be protected from pedestrian and vehicular traffic by barricades or flagging until traffic will not track it. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing shall be performed by testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. B. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

END OF SECTION